JP7319208B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

A gaming machine capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value given in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and a notification display for notifying that the given amount of game value has reached a predetermined amount. known (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-17403 A

The game machine uses specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming characters is formed for various displays such as display of the amount of reward and notification display. In addition, the game machine displays background images corresponding to various states such as advantageous states. There is room for improvement in the relationship between such specific characters and the background image .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suitably displaying a display including specific characters .

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) advantageous to a player,
Operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
As the vibration effects for vibrating the operating means, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, by vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) (such as driving the vibration motor 131) can be executed (for example, the vibration control data of the operation section effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 is used to perform the variable display effect in step S172. Production control CPU 120 for executing processing, etc.),
Light-emitting effect execution means (for example, in step AKS203) capable of executing a light-emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern) that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect Effect control CPU 120 etc.) that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined by
A specific effect execution means (for example, based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A, notification of jackpot determination, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game Effect control CPU 120 etc. for executing effect processing during variable display in step S172);
Display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.),
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the operation part effect pattern, etc.),
Depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs (for example, the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern jackpot reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.),
The vibration effect executing means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in conjunction with execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of the vibration effect during periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and executing the predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. It is executable (for example, execution of vibration effects at timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.),
The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area surrounding the first display area and narrower than the first display area (for example, the image display device 5 the display area includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51;
The display means is
The background display corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display the It is possible to display a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state, etc.),
In the second display area, it is possible to display a given amount display relating to the amount of game value to be given in front of the background display (for example, the image display device 5 can display the background video in the second display area 20SH52 on the side, it is possible to display the winning number display 20 SHK regarding the number of awarded balls, etc.),
In at least the first display area, on the front side of the background display, there are a first notification display displayed when the amount of awarded game value reaches a first predetermined amount; The second notification display that is displayed when the predetermined amount is reached, or any one of the notification display can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 displays at least the first display area 20SH51 in front of the background image. 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban", and the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached "1000". When the number of winning balls reaches ``2000'' in the jackpot game state, the winning number notification display of ``over 2000'' can be displayed. displayable, etc.),
The awarded amount display is updated each time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state). ,
The notification display is a display that ends after a specific period of time has passed since the display started (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period has passed since the display started. etc),
The character display included in the notification display has a larger display size than the character display included in the grant amount display (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK). size characters, etc.),
The character display included in the application amount display and the notification display includes a specific character display in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character display is formed (for example, acquisition number display 20SHK and acquisition number notification The characters used for the display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.),
The specific character display included in the grant amount display is such that the background display is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area. etc.),
The specific character display included in the notification display is such that the background display is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image is visible from the specific area. etc),
The display position of the specific character display included in the grant amount display is not changed during display (for example, the display position of the acquisition number display 20 SHK is not moved, see FIG. 14-4),
The display position of the specific character display included in the notification display is changed during display (for example, the display position of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is moved from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51). moving toward, moving the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 toward the left end of the display area, etc.),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, display including specific character display can be preferably displayed.
The game machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and an operation means (for example, Stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.), and vibration effects in which the operation means vibrates include a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 according to a vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, variable drive of the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the display effect control pattern) and vibration effect execution means (for example, vibration control of the operation unit effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 Effect control CPU 120 for executing effect processing during variable display in step S172 using data), and light emission effect for causing the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (e.g., a lever based on the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern). light emission of the lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, etc.) can be executed (for example, the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 is used to execute the effect processing during variable display in step S172. Production control CPU 120, etc.) and specific production execution means (for example, determined at step AKS 203) that can execute specific production (for example, reach production of SP reach A, jackpot determination notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game effect control CPU 120 for executing effect processing during variable display in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern obtained, display means (for example, pachinko game machine 1 includes image display device 5, etc.); When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation part effect pattern etc. etc.), the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, included in the operation unit effect pattern jackpot reliability according to the use of the light emitting color and the operation part production pattern, etc.), and the vibration production execution means can execute the special vibration production along with the execution of the specific production (for example, the vibration production in the period AKZ01 to AKZ05 execution, etc.), the predetermined vibration effect can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started (for example, execution of the vibration effect at timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.), and the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect can be executed. Vibration mode is different (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44), and the display area of the display means is a first display area and an area around the first display area. a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51 that is the first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than ), and the display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, , the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to a big hit game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and the background image in the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 displays the number of awarded balls on the front side of the background image in the second display area 20SH52. 20 SHK can be displayed), at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, as a notification display that notifies that the amount of added game value has reached a predetermined amount, Displaying a first notification display for notifying that the amount of game value provided has reached a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of game value provided has reached a second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 notifies at least in the first display area 20SH51 in front of the background image that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls provided in the big win game state reaches "1000", When the number of prize balls reaches "2000", it is possible to display the winning number notification display "over 2000", etc.), (for example, the winning number display 20SHK is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), and the notification display is displayed when a specific period has elapsed since the start of display. (For example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period has elapsed since the display started), and the characters used for the notification display are the same as the given amount display. The characters used are larger in size than the characters used (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.), and the grant amount display and The characters used for the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming characters is formed (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH form characters). (e.g., including a specific character that forms a specific area surrounded by lines), and the specific character used for the display of the amount to be applied is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, display of the number of acquisitions The specific characters used for 20SHK are such that the background image is not visible from a specific area, etc.), and the specific characters used for the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the number of acquisitions The specific character used for the notification display 20SHKH is characterized by the fact that the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area, etc.).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect. In addition, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In addition, the display including the specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the background image.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include an invention relating to a game machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in a game machine, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-17403, a given amount display regarding a given amount of game value given in an advantageous state advantageous to a player and a game value given are displayed. In some cases, it is possible to display a notification display for notifying that the amount has reached a predetermined amount. In such a game machine, for example, in various displays such as display of amount to be awarded and information display, specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming characters is formed are used. Background images corresponding to various states are displayed, but there is room for improvement in the relationship between such specific characters and the background image. There is a need to provide a gaming machine that can display

The game machine of means 2 is
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an image display device 5, etc.), wherein the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area surrounding the first display area and narrower than the first display area. (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. and the like), the display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, the background image corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed, etc.), in the second display area, the given game value is given in front of the background image. It is possible to display the awarded amount display related to the amount (for example, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK related to the number of awarded balls in front of the background image in the second display area 20SH52. etc.), at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, as a notification display for notifying that the amount of given game value has reached a predetermined amount, the amount of given game value is a first predetermined amount. and a second notification display that notifies that the amount of game value provided has reached the second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 can display At least in the first display area 20SH51, in the front side of the background image, in the jackpot game state, a winning number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban" is displayed. When the number of given prize balls reaches '1000', it is possible to display the obtained number notification display of 'over 1000', and the number of given prize balls reaches '2000' in a jackpot game state. Sometimes, it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display such as "over 2000"), and the awarded amount display is updated each time a game value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquisition number display 20 SHK is , updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), and the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the display started (for example, the number of winnings notification In the display 20SHKH, the display is terminated when a predetermined period has passed since the display was started, etc.), and the characters used for the notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the application amount display. (For example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH should be characters of a larger size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.). Includes specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines is formed (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH have a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters). ), and the specific characters used for the display of the amount to be given are such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions 20SHK are The background image is invisible, etc.), the specific character used for the notification display is such that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is a specific character). The background image can be visually recognized from the area, etc.).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the display including the specific characters in relation to the background image.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of stop design decision processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example regarding a setting suggestion effect execution determination table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example and a setting example regarding a setting suggestion pattern; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the execution example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the characteristic portion 10SH. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine according to the characteristic portion 10SH. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 10SH; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of vibration production|presentation, and an example of a big-hit reliability. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing of a vibration production|presentation, and a visual guidance production|presentation, and a production|presentation period. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of vibration production|presentation and visual guidance production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of vibration production|presentation and visual guidance production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a rendering device relating to characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK; It is a figure which shows the example of a setting in the case of performing an operation part production|presentation pattern and specific interlocking production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a vibration pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the production|presentation by vibration and light emission. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a continuous production|presentation pattern. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production|presentation control pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of timings at which operation section effects can be executed; It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the production|presentation which makes a game effect lamp light. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the production|presentation period which can perform specific interlocking production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example in case reach production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example in case reach production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example in case reach production|presentation is performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of music reproduction execution; It is a figure which shows the lighting example of a game effect lamp. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processing; It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; It is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the game ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display; It is a figure which shows the background art relevant to the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the like in the first form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing how the acquired number display in the first form of the characterizing portion 20SH looks. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of effect operation of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characterizing part 20SH; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a first modification of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for display of the number of acquisitions in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a second modification of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for display of the number of acquisitions in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for result display in the third form of the characterizing portion 20SH; It is a figure which shows an example of the production period of various production|presentations in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of various production|presentations in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting suggestion by the ending background image in the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH; It is a figure which shows the background art relevant to the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing how the remaining number of times display in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH looks. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining count notification display in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of the remaining count display and the remaining count notification display in the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation operation|movement when winning generate|occur|produces during the round in the characteristic part 19SH. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the characteristic portion 19SH; It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation operation|movement when over winning a prize in the characteristic part 19SH generate|occur|produces. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the characteristic portion 19SH; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of setting suggestion by over winning effects in the characteristic portion 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation operation|movement in case there exist the round which did not win a predetermined number in the characteristic part 19SH, and the round in which over winning occurred. It is a figure which shows the other example of production|presentation operation|movement in case there exist the round which did not win a predetermined number in the characteristic part 19SH, and the round in which over winning occurred.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball-hitting device is provided at the lower right position of the frame 3 for the gaming machine.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main substrate 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls to the first and second big prize openings (attackers). Of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls won by winning the 2nd starting prize mouth (electric chew) and the number of prize balls by winning the 1st big prize mouth and the 2nd big prize mouth (attacker) account for the total number of prize balls. percentage. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100 V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 30 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. As a result, when the high probability state such as the probability variable state in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, compared to the low probability state such as the normal state or the time saving state, the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is increased. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of characteristic part regarding setting suggestion effect)
Characteristic portions relating to setting suggestion effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below. In this characteristic portion, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect suggesting a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 at a predetermined rate during execution of the variable display.

FIG. 10-1 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbols, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step S202). The advance notice effect determination processing makes it possible to decide the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggesting effect.

After the announcement effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The production control pattern may include a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, a notice production control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various production executions. For example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, select one of the prepared special figure variation production control patterns and set it as a usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a usage pattern in accordance with the determination result of the notice effect determination process in step S202. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern and the notice production control pattern, but one production control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production is set. There may be.

When the production control pattern is determined by step S203, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initialization of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of RAM122 A value is set (step S204). Also, a setting is made to start changing the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined in step S203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, a pending display update setting at the start of variable display is set (step S206). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (leftmost display part) corresponding to the pending number "1" is erased (digested), and other pending numbers "2" to The hold display in the display portion corresponding to "4" etc. is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In the active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5, active display corresponding to the erased (extinguished) pending display in the pending display area may be performed. In addition, when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second starting winning, the active display area will be displayed without updating the pending display. A setting may be made to update the active display in the . After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed (step S221). Whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed can be determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main substrate 11, for example.

When the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol for non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is terminated. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "losing". The normal reach includes a case where the variable display result is "big hit" and a case where the variable display result is "loss". In the non-ready-to-win state in which the variable display mode of the decoration design does not become the ready-to-win mode, the fixed decoration design of the non-ready-to-win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop design. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined so that the "left" and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R are different (mismatched) ornamental symbols. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is "losing", the determined decorative pattern of the reach-losing combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of reach-losing. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the "left" and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R have the same (matching) ornamental symbol. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is "big hit", the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the big win. The final stop symbols at the time of the big hit are determined to be the same (matching) decoration symbols in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

When the ready-to-win effect of super-ready-to-win is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol for super-to-win is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "loss". At the time of super reach when the variable display result is "losing", the determined decoration pattern of the reach losing combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of reaching losing. When the variable display result is "big win", the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the big win.

At the time of super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "losing", the same (matching) decorative design in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R is It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decoration pattern. The left and right decoration patterns that constitute such a reach-losing combination or a big-hit combination are also called reach patterns. Decorative patterns that can be determined as ready-to-win patterns may include a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as seven types of decorative patterns corresponding to numbers 1 to 7, for example. The decoration pattern corresponding to the number may be only the effect image showing the number, or may be the effect image showing various characters in addition to the number. The ready-to-win pattern is determined as one of a plurality of decorative patterns by referring to a ready-to-win pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the ready-to-win pattern. You can do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number for determining the ready-to-win pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

In the ready-to-win pattern determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be ready-to-win symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win". For example, when the variable display result is "losing", the determination rate of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As it becomes, the determination ratio of the decorative design becomes lower, and the determination ratio of the decorative design corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "big hit", the determination rate of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As the number becomes , the ratio of determining the decorative pattern increases, and the determining ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number of 7 becomes the highest. With such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern, the variable display result is "big win" and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state is the highest. , 5, 4, 3, and 2, the variable display result when stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern becomes "big hit", and the ratio of control to the big win game state is low. Thus, when the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern, the variable display result becomes "big win", and the ratio of control to the big win game state becomes the lowest. In the ready-to-win pattern determination table, regardless of whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win", the same number of determination values may be assigned to decorative patterns to be ready-to-win symbols. The number of determination values assigned to each decorative design to be a ready-to-win pattern may be different, or the number of determination values to be assigned may be the same regardless of the decorative design to be a ready-to-win design. Depending on the type of jackpot, the determination ratio of decorative symbols to be ready-to-win symbols may differ.

After step S223, it is determined whether or not the determined ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach symbol is a decoration symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. If the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S225). Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined by, for example, referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution. You can do so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . As the presence/absence of the setting suggesting effect, one of "no effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is not executed, or "with effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is executed is determined.

Based on the result of determination in step S225, it is determined whether or not it is determined that "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect (step S226). If it is determined to be "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. If it is determined that there is an effect (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 may receive a setting value notification command transmitted from the main substrate 11 side when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and store the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . Accordingly, in step S227, the setting values stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, after determining the suggested setting pattern (step S228), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random values for determining the suggested setting pattern. It should be determined by The numerical data indicating the random number value for setting suggestion pattern determination may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

FIG. 10-3 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. For example, the ROM 121 pre-stores table data constituting a determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 10-3 as a setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table TA01. In the determination table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win". For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of "with effect" for executing the setting suggesting effect is higher than when the variable display result is "losing". In the setting of such a determination ratio, when the setting suggesting performance is executed, the variable display result becomes ``big hit'' and the ratio of being controlled to the big winning game state becomes higher than when the setting suggesting performance is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion effect execution determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big hit". .

FIG. 10-4(A) shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggested contents depending on whether or not the symbol display color is to be changed, and the display color when it is to be changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win symbol, and can be changed to suggestive display colors including copper color, silver color, and gold color in addition to the normal display color red. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, suggesting that the player has a low expectation, which is an advantageous set value. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, suggesting confirmation of 6, which is the highest setting. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 according to whether or not the pattern display color has changed and the pattern display color after the change.

FIG. 10-4(B) shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 pre-stores table data forming a determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 10-4(B) as a suggested setting pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, a suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern varies depending on the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

When the setting suggesting performance using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, the ready-to-win pattern becomes a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of control to the big win game state is high. When the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the degree of expectation, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low, and when the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. Something is certain. In addition, when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-2, the degree of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is high, and when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-3, the set value is the highest. 6 is determined. In this way, the ready-to-win symbols when the variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode include a symbol display mode for suggesting control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode for 7. A pattern display mode for suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 while suggesting the control of the jackpot game state such as the decoration pattern corresponding to the number is included. When the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, the ready-to-win pattern is displayed in the normal display color to suggest control of the jackpot game state, and then the pattern display color is changed. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are continuously made, and suggestions regarding the set values are made.

The setting-suggestion effect can be executed in different effect modes according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the pattern display color is not changed to copper because the pattern RE-1 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern. Thus, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, as a pattern display mode when the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, the pattern display color is changed to copper color or not. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the pattern display color is not changed to gold because the pattern RE-3 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern. Thus, depending on whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is changed to gold as the symbol display mode when the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. It depends on whether or not it is changed to

The setting suggesting effect is instead of changing the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decoration symbol stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win symbol, or in addition to changing the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape and pattern of the decoration pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image, or any other effect image, output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of decorative light emitters such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, and the like. It may be one that changes the rendering mode by any rendering device, such as a combination of some or all. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko game machine 1 are arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data combining these are predetermined for effect execution. It suffices if it can be executed when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied. The effect of changing the symbol display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the game is controlled to the big win game state, and a pattern that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to the big win game state. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate even when the variable display result is "loss", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display It may be possible to make the decision possible only when the result is a "big hit" and to make the decision impossible when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the current setting.

FIG. 10-5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step S241). When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, or blinked. It is sufficient that various effects can be executed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of them.

In the effect processing during variable display, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step S242). If it is the notice effect period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the notice effect (step S243). If it is not the notice effect period (step S242; No), or after performing the control of step S243, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244). When it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step S245). By the control of step S245, when the ready-to-win performance after changing the symbol display color is executed after the decoration pattern to be the ready-to-win pattern is stop-displayed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are made, and the pachinko game machine 1 is operated. Suggestions regarding settings can be made.

When it is not the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; No), or after performing the control of step S245, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step S246). The change effect period may be determined in advance as an effect execution period for changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. When it is the change effect period (step S246; Yes), control to execute the change effect is performed (step S247). If it is not a change effect period (step S246; No), after performing the control of step S247, for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, etc. In addition, the variable of the decorative pattern After performing control for executing an effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect processing during the variable display is terminated.

The change effect period may be set to different time lengths according to the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of pattern 2, the change effect period may be set to the third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. In general, when an effect (advantageous effect) is executed, the player shoots an image or video of the effect with a portable terminal owned by the player, and sends it to SNS (Social There is a tendency to post on membership registration websites such as Networking Service and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, the effect (unfavorable effect) that is often performed even in a disadvantageous situation does not arouse the desire to shoot, so if the execution period of the disadvantageous effect is long, the player will rather feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the photographing time, and the execution period of disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that of advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking an effect that is advantageous to the player, and to secure the shooting time. In addition, since the photographing time can be secured, the photographed images and moving images are made public by the players on the Internet, and public interest in the pachinko game machine 1 can be heightened. In addition, in many cases, since the images including which pachinko game machine 1 in which game hall were photographed are disclosed, from the game hall side, the game hall is advertised by the player. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game arcade side.

When the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a design confirmation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step S249). If no pattern confirmation command is received (step S249; No), the effect process during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the design confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so. When the design determination command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop design (determined decoration design) which is the display result in the variable display of the decoration design (step S250). Subsequently, a certain period of time is set in advance as a wait time for receiving a command specifying the start of a big hit (step S251). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is the value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S252), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 10-6 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 10-6(A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the form of variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode and ready-to-win is established. When the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the ready-to-win is established and the ready-to-win performance of the normal ready-to-win is executed. FIG. 10-6(B) shows an effect execution example HD102 in which the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is advanced to the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decoration pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the effect image in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is displayed. FIG. 10-6(C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect as a setting suggestion effect is executed. An effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed superimposed on the stop-displayed ready-to-win pattern. In addition, by displaying an effect image announcing a message such as "Change the symbol display color!", a suggestion to change the symbol display color is made.

FIG. 10-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the pattern display color does not change due to the pattern RE-0. FIG. 10-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the pattern display color changes to copper by the pattern RE-1. FIG. 10-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the pattern display color changes to silver by the pattern RE-2. FIG. 10-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to gold according to the pattern RE-3. In the effect execution example HD111, the display color of the ready-to-win pattern does not change due to the pattern RE-0, and remains red, which is the normal display color. In this way, a failure effect (fake effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the player's expectation, which is an advantageous set value, is low. In effect execution example HD112, pattern RE-1 changes the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. In effect execution example HD113, pattern RE-2 changes the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to silver, suggesting that the player has a high expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. In effect execution example HD114, pattern RE-3 changes the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to gold, suggesting that 6, which is the highest set value, is fixed.

The setting suggesting effect suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit by any desired effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a pre-reading notice effect, in addition to a change effect in which the display color of the ready-to-win pattern can be changed, and the set value of the pachinko game machine 1. You may enable it to make a suggestion about. It may be an effect in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested after the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is performed during execution of the variable display. In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, a case where the suggestion regarding the control of the big win game state is continuously made after making the suggestion concerning the control of the big win game state, or the suggestion concerning the control of the big win game state is continuously made and the pachinko game is performed. It may also include a case of suggesting a set value of the gaming machine 1 . In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, after making a suggestion about the control of the big win game state, when the suggestion ends, and when the suggestion about the control of the big win game state is continued and the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is made. It may include a case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion about the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether or not the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by suggesting the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate. can be diversified to improve amusement.

During execution of the variable display, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state may be made, while suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the pachinko machine executes a big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and a big hit effect (such as a effect corresponding to the first round and the second round). A setting value of 1 may be suggested. There may be a case where the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot game state.

In place of part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, or together with part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, a suggestion about control of a state advantageous to the player different from the big win game state is provided. can be anything. For example, it may suggest a variable probability state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as the advantageous state, a suggestion may be made according to whether or not control is to be performed regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 10SH)
Next, the characterizing portion 10SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, as described above.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 10SH includes operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like.

The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 10SH includes vibration effect executing means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 10SH includes a line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B.

The game machine according to the characteristic part 10SH is expected to be controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed rather than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a higher jackpot reliability when the vibration performance is executed than when the vibration performance is not executed.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH can execute the vibration effect at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the timing T2 when the reach is established, and the normal reach after the timing T1 and the timing T2. The vibration performance can be executed at any one of the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance and the timing T4 during execution of the super ready-to-win performance.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 pushes the push button 31B regardless of whether it is timing T1 or timing T2 or timing T3 or timing T4. Vibration production can be executed in a mode in which the vibration time and the luminescent color are common.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the timing T1 and the timing T2.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the visual guidance effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

The game machine related to the characteristic part 10SH includes a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect of super reach.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect when the reach effect of super reach is being executed.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 10SH includes display means for displaying. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5 that displays various effect images.

The display of the line-of-sight guidance effect related to the characteristic portion 10SH has a lower priority than the display of the predetermined information and a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information. For example, the performance image of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the constant small pattern, the pending number display, and various error notifications, and has a higher priority than the pending display, the active display, the background image, and the decoration pattern.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 10SH, showing the arrangement layout of the main members.

The push button 31B is made of a translucent member, and a game effect lamp 9B for game effects is provided inside the push button 31B. According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be illuminated by turning on the game effect lamp 9B.

Further, the push button 31B is configured to vibrate by being driven by the vibration motor 131. As shown in FIG. The vibration motor 131 is composed of, for example, an eccentric motor in which a weight with a biased center of gravity is provided on the motor shaft, and is provided inside or close to the push button 31B. In addition, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided in order to diversify the vibration mode of the push button 31B.

Game effect lamps 9L and 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided on the left side of the push button 31B and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided on the right side of the push button 31B and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. A plurality of LEDs are built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R along the extending direction of the game effect lamps 9L and 9R.

(Substrate configuration)
FIG. 11-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to turn on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamps 9B, 9L and 9R. The lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R are turned on/off. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls lighting/extinguishing of the lamp. It should be noted that the lighting/extinguishing control of the lamp may be executed by the effect control CPU 120 .

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a motor control board 130, for example. The display control unit 123 supplies a motor signal to the motor control board 130 in order to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits for driving the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. The display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131 in this way. Note that the control of the vibration motor 131 may be executed by the effect control CPU 120 .

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 10SH. The effect control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 11-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variation pattern of the variable display to be executed from now on and the display result of the variable display to be executed from now on (step 10SHS1). A variation pattern and a display result are transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of the variable display and specified by the effect control command analyzed by the command analysis process. The final stop pattern is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the combination of the variation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Lottery here refers to a determination method based on random numbers and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121 . As the random number value, one of random numbers for effect updated by the random number circuit 124 or random number update process for effect is used.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the vibration effect, and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect (step 10SHS2). The vibration effect is a effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect that does not interlock with the notice effect. In the process of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the vibration effect, and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect, by means of a random number and a lottery based on a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. decide.

In the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, when the vibration performance is executed, the reliability of the big win becomes higher than when the vibration performance is not executed, and when the vibration performance is executed, the reliability of the big win depends on the execution pattern of the vibration performance. is different, the determination value to be compared with the random value may be assigned to the determination result of the presence or absence of the vibration performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance when the vibration performance is executed.

Here, the reliability of a certain effect A is, for example, (the probability that the effect A will be executed when the display result is a “big hit”)×(the probability that the display result will be a “big hit”)/{(display result Probability that production A will be executed when is a "jackpot") x (Probability that the display result will be a "jackpot") + (Probability that production A will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot") x ( Probability that the display result will not be a "big hit")}.

Therefore, in the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, the vibration effect of each execution pattern is displayed when the display result is "big win" so that the reliability of the big win corresponding to the execution pattern of the vibration effect becomes a predetermined value. It is sufficient if the probability of execution and the probability of execution of the vibration effect of each execution pattern when the display result is not a "big win" are defined.

(Details of vibration production and reliability of jackpot)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of the big win. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment, according to the combination of the execution timing of the vibration effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the light emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, executes patterns SE1 to A plurality of types of vibration effects of SE10 can be executed.

The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started or the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established. That is, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, when executing the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Also, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, the vibration effect is not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE4 as the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is, after the timing T1 and the timing T2, the timing T3 during execution of the reach effect of normal reach and the timing T4 during execution of reach effect of super reach. Vibration effect can be executed at any of the timings. That is, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win when executing the vibration effect at the timing T3 when the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is being executed. Further, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration performance at timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of normal reach when executing the vibration performance at timing T4 during execution of ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration production of the execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as the vibration production at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win production of normal reach. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as the vibration effect at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach.

According to such a configuration, since the vibrating effect may be executed while the ready-to-win effect of the super reach is being executed, it is possible to improve the amusement.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach, or the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is being executed. , irrespective of whether it is the timing T4 or not, a vibration production in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated and a vibrating effect in which the is illuminated in red. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration productions of the execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as vibration productions in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. is. In addition, the production control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration productions of the execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as vibration productions in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. is.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment vibrates the push button 31B for three seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors regardless of the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed. Vibration production can be executed. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the vibration production of execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as a vibration production in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. It is possible.

In this embodiment, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and vibrates for 3 seconds more than when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed. The reliability of the big hit is higher when the vibration performance is executed in which the push button 31B emits red light. Further, in this embodiment, the reliability of the vibrating effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and lighting the push button 31B in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result is "big hit". to be reported deterministically.

According to such a configuration, when the push button 31B vibrates, attention can be paid to what color the push button 31B emits light and how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed, and when the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and is pushed When the vibration effect of making the button 31B emit red light is executed, the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the execution timing of the vibration effect. For example, even if the vibration effect is the same mode, it is better to execute it at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started than when it is executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach. Highly reliable. Further, even if the vibration effect of the same mode is executed, it is executed at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, rather than at the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. , The reliability of the jackpot is high.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten expectations for the execution of the vibration effect at the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Further, when the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode when the vibration effect is not executed at timing T1, the ready-to-reach effect of super ready-to-win is performed instead of the ready-to-reach effect of normal reach at time T3 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect. It is possible to heighten expectations for the execution of the vibration presentation at timing T4 during execution. Then, when the vibrating performance is not actually executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach, the expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-reach performance of the super ready-to-reach is heightened. be able to.

Incidentally, the reliability of the big hit of the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach should be higher than the reliability of the normal reach. In addition, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of ready-to-win productions of normal reach, and if the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the type of ready-to-win production of normal reach, the reliability of the big hit of vibration production that can be executed at timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win production of normal reach is , it may be higher than the hit reliability of the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach executed at that time, or higher than the hit reliability of any kind of ready-to-win performance of the normal reach.

Similarly, the reliability of the big hit of the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the super-reach should be higher than the reliability of the super-ready-to-win. Further, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of ready-to-win performances of super ready-to-win, and when the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the type of ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, the big hit of vibrating performance to be executed at timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win. The reliability should be higher than the big win reliability of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win being executed at that time, or higher than the big-hit reliability of any kind of ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win.

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach and the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of the super ready-to-win can be regarded as the chance-up effect. can do.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when reach is established, the vibration effect is always executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. Then, it is definitely notified that the display result will be a "jackpot".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten expectations for the execution of the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, not at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Then, when the vibration performance is actually not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win is established can be further heightened.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to intricately change the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect as the variable display of the decoration pattern progresses.

In addition, the probability of executing the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in rainbow colors is sufficiently low compared to the probability of executing the vibration effect of other modes. By stipulating, it is possible to heighten interest when it is definitely reported that the display result will be a "big hit".

Further, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated as a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always illuminated.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, and increase the chances of recognizing that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the description of FIG. 11-3, after that, according to the determination result of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 controls the timing T3 during execution of the reach effect of normal reach and the reach effect of super reach in this variable display. It is determined whether or not to execute the vibration effect at the timing T4 during execution or not (step 10SHS3).

Then, when the vibration effect is executed at one of the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach and the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach (step 10SHS3; Yes), effect The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect (step 10SHS4). The line-of-sight guidance effect is a effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. In the processing of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect by means of a random number and a lottery based on a table prepared in the ROM 121 in advance. In the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio of presence/absence of visual guidance effect is set regardless of which mode of vibration effect is executed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 determines presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect at the same rate regardless of which mode the current vibration effect is.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach or timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. In addition, it is possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before the vibration effect is executed, so that the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

On the other hand, when the vibration performance is executed at one of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decoration pattern is started and the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win state is established, the visual guidance performance is not executed.

Here, when the display result is derived and displayed, the true display result may be derived and displayed after the display result of "missing" is displayed. Therefore, even though the display result of the previous variable display is derived and displayed and the current variable display is started, when the visual guidance effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, There is a possibility of causing a misunderstanding as if a relief effect was being executed in the previous variable display. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, such misunderstanding can be prevented.

Also, if the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed at the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win state is established, there is a possibility that it may not be possible to appropriately recognize that the state of variable display of decorative symbols has become the predetermined ready-to-win state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, it is possible to properly recognize that the state of variable display of the decoration pattern has become the predetermined ready-to-win state. .

Returning to the description of FIG. 11-3, when the vibration effect is not executed at one of the timing T3 during execution of the reach effect of normal reach and the timing T4 during execution of reach effect of super reach ( Step 10SHS3; No) or after executing the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not other effects such as ready-to-win effects are to be executed, and the mode of the effect to be executed (step 10SHS5). Specifically, whether or not various effects such as advance notice effects are to be executed and the mode thereof are determined by lottery. At this time, by varying the decision ratio in the lottery according to the display result of this time, the fluctuation pattern of this time, etc., the reliability of the big win can be varied according to the presence or absence of execution of the advance notice performance or the like and its mode. Also, when the current pattern designates reach, it is determined to execute the reach effect designated by the variation pattern.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the effect determined to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the production control CPU120 sets the timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to this fluctuation pattern as an initial value to the production control process timer, and the type and mode of production determined to be executed. is stored in a timer value storage area of RAM 122 in association with an execution timing specific timer value that indicates the execution timing of the production by comparison with the timer value of the production control process timer. When there are a plurality of effects determined to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect specifying data and the execution timing specific timer value in the timer value storage area for each effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 supplies to the display control unit 123 an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols for deriving the mode specified by the current variation pattern and the determined final stop symbol (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and starts variable display of the decoration pattern. At this time, the display corresponding to the variable display may be updated.

Thereafter, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 10SHS8), the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Execution timing and production period of vibration production and gaze guidance production)
FIG. 11-5 is a diagram showing an example of execution timings and presentation periods of the vibration presentation and the line-of-sight guidance presentation. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started or the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established. Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at one of the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect and the timing T4 during execution of the super reach effect. It is possible.

In addition, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at one of the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect and the timing T4 during execution of the super reach effect. In that case, it is possible to execute the visual guidance effect before that.

The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment starts the visual guidance performance four seconds before the timing T3 when executing the visual guidance performance before executing the vibration performance at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach. , the vibration performance is started when the timing T3 comes. Similarly, the production control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the visual guidance production before executing the vibration production at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win production of super reach, four seconds before the timing T4. Performance is started, and vibration performance is started when timing T4 comes. The production period of the line-of-sight guidance production in this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed for the first second while the visual guidance effect is being executed.

According to such a configuration, since the sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(Example of production operation)
FIGS. 11-6 and 11-7 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. In this production operation example, an example in which the vibration production is executed at timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win production of super reach will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a plurality of types of reach effect of super reach. The effect control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach in the reach effect of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A), a background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery" is displayed as the background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

In addition, when the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is started, the effect control CPU 120 reduces and displays the decoration pattern that was stop-displayed when the ready-to-win was established. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A), the "left" ready-to-win decorative pattern 10SH5L is obtained by reducing the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L when the ready-to-win is established. , and a "right" ready-to-win decorative pattern 10SH5R that is reduced from the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R when the ready-to-win is established.

A small pattern display area 10SHK smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is provided at the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, variable display of small patterns is performed in synchronization with variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns. The effect image showing the small pattern is also called a notification information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect image showing the small symbol as the notification information image is variably displayed, and the effect image showing the confirmed small symbol as the display result is displayed. derived.

In this manner, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small pattern different from the decoration pattern is performed. During the period from the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern to the derivation of the fixed decoration pattern as the display result, the variable display of the small pattern is continuously performed in a fixed display mode, and the small pattern disappears from the screen or is obstructed. It is not shielded by Therefore, the small symbol display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 10SHK. The small patterns that are variably displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK are also called constant small patterns or small patterns for performance. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, for example, in a display mode that is partially or wholly common to each of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as a pattern that indicates numbers in the same manner as the part that indicates numbers in the decorative pattern, a plurality of identifiable An effect image showing the type of small symbol may be variably displayed as the notification information image. It should be noted that the small symbols may be displayed only when the decorative symbols are not displayed. For example, after the variable display of the decoration pattern is displayed in the reach mode, instead of the variable display of the decoration pattern, the variable display of the small pattern is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. may be displayed in the lower left corner of the

In addition, a special pattern, a decorative pattern, and a fourth pattern next to the normal pattern are provided, and the variable display of the fourth pattern may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern. The variable display of the fourth pattern is, for example, in a fourth pattern display area provided on or outside the screen of the image display device 5, and repeats display and non-display in a specific display color at regular time intervals. This is achieved by continuing display control. However, the display result of the variable display of the small symbols may be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize when compared with the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol.

Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are, for example, as shown in FIG. are located at a distance. Therefore, the player who pays attention to the effect by the display on the image display device 5 becomes difficult to confirm the display state of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbols progresses. It may be difficult to recognize whether it is in progress or whether the display result has been derived. On the other hand, small patterns are variably displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, and by deriving the display result, it is possible to determine whether the variable display is in progress, Whether or not the display result is derived can be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

In this example, a suspended display area 10SHH for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended, and an active display area 10SHA for displaying active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. , is displayed. Incidentally, when the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is being executed, the reservation display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SHA may not be displayed.

A pending number display area 10SHHS is provided at the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 . In the reserved number display area 10SHHS, similarly to the reserved display area 10SHH, the reserved number of variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the special game is displayed so as to be identifiable. The display mode is a mode displayed in Arabic numerals.

Then, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the line-of-sight guidance effect four seconds before the timing T4 during execution of the reach effect of super reach. The effect control CPU 120 executes, as the line-of-sight guidance effect, an effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using a visual effect, for example.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC imitating a character holding a hammer and a button image 10SHB imitating the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 11-6(B). do.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 changes the aspect of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings up the hammer as shown in FIGS. 11-6(B) to 11-6(D). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. Light so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 changes the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer as shown in FIGS. 11-7(E) and (F). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R in accordance with the action of the character swinging down the hammer, as shown in FIGS. Light so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11-7(G), the effect control CPU 120 causes the hammer swung down by the character to collide with the button image 10SHB at timing T4, and the button image 10SHB produces a plurality of stars imitating the button image 10SHB. The various images are changed so that the "star" effect image 10SHS is scattered. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the effect control CPU 120 starts the vibration effect at the timing T4, vibrates the push button 31B, and is built in the push button 31B. The game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned on.

Then, one second after the timing T4, the effect control CPU 120 ends the line-of-sight guidance effect, as shown in FIG. 11-7(H). After that, when the vibration time of the push button 31B by the vibration effect has passed, the effect control CPU 120 ends the vibration effect, stops the vibration of the push button 31B, and the game effect lamp built in the push button 31B. 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned off.

Here, the push button 31B is provided at a position apart from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, below the game area of the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a player who pays attention to the display effect on the image display device 5 to check the state of the push button 31B. It can be difficult to recognize whether On the other hand, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to make the user pay attention to the push button 31B before the push button 31B vibrates. The vibration of the button 31B can be favorably recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

In addition, the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is always set lower than the small pattern and the display of the number of reservations. This priority setting can be realized by displaying a line-of-sight guidance effect in a layer on the back side of the layer that always displays the small patterns and the display of the number of reservations among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7(G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is always displayed on the back side of the small pattern displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of , always has a lower priority than the small pattern.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed on the back side of the display of the number of reservations displayed in the number of reservations display area 10SHHS, and the line of sight It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the induction effect, has a lower priority than the display of the number of reservations.

On the other hand, the priority of the visual guidance effect display is set higher than the pending display, the active display, the background image, and the decoration pattern. This priority setting can be realized by displaying a line-of-sight guidance effect in a layer on the front side of a layer that displays a background image or a decorative pattern among a plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-6(B) to 11-7(G), the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB are displayed in front of the background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery". It can be said that the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB, which are displays for the visual guidance effect, have a higher priority than the background image 10SHY of the "mountain scenery".

In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. It can be said that the character image 10SHC, which is the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the "left" ready-to-win decoration symbol 10SH5L and the "right" ready-to-win decoration symbol 10SH5R.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(D), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. Therefore, it can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed on the front side of the suspension display displayed in the suspension display area 10SHH, and the line of sight guidance effect It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of , has a higher priority than the reserved display.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(G), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed in front of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and the line of sight guidance effect is displayed. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of , has a higher priority than the active display.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made conspicuous while always suitably ensuring the visibility of the small pattern and the display of the number of reservations.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. Also, the display of small patterns and the number of pending items, which have high priority, are displayed brightly, and the other displays are displayed darkly.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made more conspicuous while always ensuring the visibility of the small pattern and the display of the number of reservations more preferably. .

(Modified example of characteristic portion 10SH)
The invention relating to the characteristic portion 10SH is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4 in FIG. 11-3, the determination ratio of presence/absence of visual guidance effect may be set according to which mode of vibration effect is to be executed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the current vibration effect is a vibrating effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, or the push button 31B is held for 3 seconds. Depending on whether the vibration effect is a mode in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, or the vibration effect is a mode in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. The presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect may be determined at different ratios. Here, when the vibrating effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, it is easy to execute the visual guidance effect. Also, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors is executed, the visual guidance effect is always executed. In other words, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the execution ratio of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect with the higher reliability of the big win by executing the visual guidance effect.

The effect control CPU 120 may be configured to be able to execute a vibration effect interlocking with the advance notice effect. In this case, as the vibration effect interlocked with the notice effect, a plurality of types are available according to the combination of the interlocking notice effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect. may be executable. The performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance foretelling the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed, depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32 . Then, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect interlocking with the highly reliable character object announcement effect. This vibration effect is a effect of vibrating the push button 31B in synchronism with the movement of the movable body 32 and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. Incidentally, in this case, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration production should be higher than the reliability of the big win of the interlocking character product announcement production. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be used as a chance-up effect in the character object announcement effect.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect interlocking with another highly reliable advance notice effect. This vibration effect is a effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated in synchronization with the image displayed in the advance notice effect, and the push button 31B emits white light. In this case, the reliability of the vibration performance should be higher than the reliability of the announcement performance to be linked. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be a chance-up effect in the advance notice effect.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after the finalized decoration pattern that becomes the jackpot combination is derived, the game balls pass through a specific area provided in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a specific passage gate or winning opening. By doing so, a big hit game state may be started. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery effect for notifying the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when a game ball passing through a specific area is detected. The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect interlocking with the round lottery effect. This vibration performance is a mode of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and lighting the push button 31B in white when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, and is executed in the jackpot game state. It notifies that the upper limit number of rounds to be played is not the minimum number of rounds among the multiple options. Alternatively, as the vibration performance, when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors to achieve a big hit. The upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the game state may be definitely notified that the number of rounds is the highest among the plurality of options. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration effect linked with the round lottery effect.

The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing error notification processing. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying the occurrence of an error is received from the main board 11 or when an error is detected in the performance control board 12, error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 and a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The effect control CPU 120 can display an error notification image corresponding to an error on the image display device 5 while executing the line-of-sight guidance effect. In that case, the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect should have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably secure the visibility of the error notification image even when the visual guidance effect is being executed when the error notification image is displayed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between when the visual guidance effect is executed and when the visual guidance effect is not executed. For example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed. You can improve your interest when you play. Further, for example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, even if the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. , it is easy for the user to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance may be different between the timing before the reference timing and the timing after the reference timing with reference to a certain timing. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to 1.5 seconds at the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, which is the timing before the timing T2, based on the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win state is established. , 3 seconds at timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win production of normal reach, which is the timing after timing T2, and timing T4 during execution of ready-to-win production of super ready-to-win, which is the timing after timing T2. The vibration time at the timing after the reference timing should be longer than the vibration time at the timing before the timing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the vibration presentation is executed after the reference timing.

Depending on the strength of the vibration of the push button 31B, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration presentation may differ. For example, there are times when the push button 31B is vibrated with a first strength and when it is vibrated with a second strength that is greater than the first strength, and the push button 31B is vibrated with the second strength. When the push button 31B is vibrated with the first strength, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration presentation should be made higher than that when the push button 31B is vibrated with the first strength. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the intensity of vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win may be common between the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model different from the first model. According to such a configuration, in the first model pachinko game machine 1 and the second model pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to eliminate variations in the execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling discomfort.

A vibrating effect may be executed as a pre-reading foretelling effect for foretelling the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the vibration effect.

In addition to this, when the vibration effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect is the first mode and the second mode. , the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution to be the target of the pre-reading notice may be different. For example, when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the anticipatory notice effect is a mode in which the vibration continues for a predetermined period of time, and a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined period of time, Reliability levels of big hits are made different in variable display before execution to be the target of pre-reading notice. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration effect as the pre-reading preview effect.

Alternatively, when the vibration effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, the execution timing of the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect is a plurality of vibration effects that can be executed as the notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed. may be executed only at one of the timings of . For example, the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect can be executed only at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. According to such a configuration, when the vibration performance is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the vibration performance as the foreseeing notice can be executed, the vibration performance is the foretelling performance for foretelling the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed. has been executed.

At the timing at which the vibration performance as the advance notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display during execution can be executed, the reliability of the big hit in the variable display under execution is announced when the vibration effect is executed as the foreseeing advance notice effect. The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the advance notice effect may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the anticipation effect. For example, when it is possible to execute a vibration effect as a pre-reading notice effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed. is 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B is 1.5 seconds in the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as the notice performance for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display during execution is set to vibrate continuously for a predetermined time, and the push button 31B in the vibration performance as the look-ahead notice performance. The vibration mode of is a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined period of time. According to such a configuration, at the timing at which the vibration production as the advance notice production for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed can be executed, when the vibration production as the foreseeing advance notice production can be executed, any It is possible to easily recognize whether or not the vibration presentation has been executed.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win, the performance is executed at a specific timing. Regarding the vibration performance, even if the mode of the vibration performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the mode of the vibration performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model are different, the jackpot is won. The reliability may be common. For example, regarding the vibration effect executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the light emission mode of the push button 31B in the specific effect executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model Even if the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance to be executed is different, the reliability of the big win is 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the model of the pachinko game machine 1 is different, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the execution of the vibration performance at the specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the effect executed at that time, for example, when the visual guidance effect is not executed. For example, in the case of executing a notification effect for notifying that a ready-to-win situation has been established at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win situation is established, the vibrating effect is performed by vibrating the push button 31B during the period when the image of the notification effect is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the effect being executed at that time is generated, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win, vibration of the same execution pattern. As for the effect, only the lower limit of the reliability of the big win may be guaranteed. According to such a configuration, for example, when the vibration performance is executed as a chance-up performance of another performance, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration performance can be flexibly set in relation to the reliability of the big win of the other performance. While adjusting, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed at timings different from the timings T1 to T4. For example, the CPU 120 for performance control temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination which is not a big-win combination after the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes the ready-to-win mode, and then the reliability of the big win is higher than that of the ready-to-win mode. It is possible to execute an incendiary production to incite the development to the reach mode. After the fanning performance is executed, there are a case where the ready-to-win state with high reliability of big win is developed and a case where the display result becomes "lost" without developing into a ready-to-win state with high reliability of big win. In the case of developing into a ready-to-win mode with high reliability of big win, the CPU 120 for performance control executes a success performance for informing that the ready-to-win mode with high reliability of big win is developed as a result of the performance of the performance of inciting performance. On the other hand, when the display result is ``lost'' without developing into a ready-to-win mode with high reliability of big win, the CPU 120 for performance control notifies that the ready-to-reach mode with high reliability of big win is not developed as a performance result of the fanning performance. Execute the instigation failure performance. In executing such a fanning effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at the timing of executing the fanning success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the inciting success effect is executed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the successful fanning effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the successful fanning effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest when the inciting success effect is executed.

The luminescent color of the push button 31B in the vibration performance executable at the timing of executing the fanning success performance is the vibration of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration performances of a plurality of types of execution patterns executable at other timings. The push button 31B in the presentation may have the same luminous color as the luminous color. According to such a configuration, when the inciting success effect is executed, there is a possibility that the display result will be "lost" even if it develops into a ready-to-win mode with high reliability of the big win, but the reliability of the big win is excessively increased. You can prevent it from rising.

In addition, when the display result is a "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing immediately before stopping and displaying the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern. According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to improve the amusement at the timing immediately before the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, but also to heighten expectations for the vibration performance itself, and to perform the vibration performance at other timings as well. You can improve your interest when you play.

When the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win, the advantage to the player is obtained. Even in the case of a "jackpot" of a jackpot type different from the jackpot type with the highest degree of advantage among a plurality of types of different jackpot types, the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect can be "rainbow color". do. According to such a configuration, when the luminescent color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect becomes "rainbow color", it is possible to avoid misunderstanding that it is a "jackpot" of the jackpot type with the highest degree of advantage. can be

If there are only two types of advantages for the player depending on the type of jackpot, the execution pattern in which the light emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is "rainbow" may not be provided. According to such a configuration, even though the push button 31B emits light in the "rainbow color" in the vibration effect, it is possible to prevent the "big win" of the big win type having a low advantage for the player. It is possible to prevent the feeling of expectation for the vibration performance from being spoiled.

The performance control CPU 120 may guide the player's line of sight to the push button 31B using an auditory performance effect as the visual direction guidance performance. For example, the production control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound effect when the vibration production is being executed, and then gradually increases the volume of the specific sound effect from a small volume to a large volume as the visual guidance production. Output to change. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player who has difficulty in recognizing the line-of-sight guidance performance using the visual performance effect pay attention to the operation means before the operation means vibrates.

When the winning probability of the big win is changed according to the set value, the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value can be used even in the same execution pattern of the vibration performance. The reliability of the big hit of the vibration performance of the execution pattern may differ from one time to another. For example, even in the vibration performance of the same execution pattern, when the set value is "6", the reliability of the big hit of the vibration performance of the execution pattern should be higher than when the set value is "1". . According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result is a "big hit", it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value is highly advantageous.

When the winning probability of the big win is changed according to the set value, the push button 31B in the vibration performance is changed between the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value. may differ in vibration time and emission color. According to such a configuration, the set value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, when the set value is one of "1" to "3" and when the set value is one of "4" to "6", the push button 31B in the vibration effect It suffices if the vibration time and the emission color are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the high setting, which may be the set value "6", which is the most advantageous for the player, is set by the vibration effect. Further, for example, the vibration time and the light emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between when the set value is an odd number and when the set value is an even number. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not it is an even set value that may be the set value "6", which is the most advantageous set value for the player, by the vibration effect.

At the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. It may be possible to execute a vibration effect in which the light is emitted. According to such a configuration, even at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, not only the execution of the vibration effect but also the mode when the vibration effect is executed can be noticed.

At the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. In the case where it is possible to execute the vibration effect in which the light is emitted, the vibration effect is executed at both the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established. There may be In this case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T1 or timing T2, the vibration at the timing T1 is performed. A specific combination of the execution pattern of the performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance at the timing T2 may deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. Even if the vibration performance is not executed, it is possible not only to heighten the expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win is established, but also to increase the attention to the mode of the vibration performance at the timing T2. .

The vibration effect may be executed at either timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach and timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. In that case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for three seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T3 or timing T4, the vibration at the timing T3 is performed. A specific combination of the execution pattern of the performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance at the timing T4 may deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is vibrated in rainbow colors. Even if the performance is not executed, not only can the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T4 during the execution of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win be enhanced, but also the mode of the vibration performance at the timing T4 can be more focused. can be enhanced.

The vibration duration and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the mode of vibration performance for deterministically notifying that the display result will be a "big hit" are those that do not deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit". The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in 1 may be different. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the mode of vibrating the display result of a "big hit" is changed to the vibration time of the vibration mode of the mode not informing the display result of the "big hit". The vibration time is set to be longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B. Alternatively, while the vibration mode of the push button 31B is monotonous in the mode of vibration performance that does not deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit", it will definitely notify that the display result will be a "big hit". In the vibration effect of the mode, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with a predetermined beat. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the vibration effect in the form of deterministically informing that the display result will be a "big hit" is a special vibration effect.

When the vibrating effect is executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of normal reach or the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of super reach, the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed without fail. According to such a configuration, the expectation that the display result will be a "big hit" due to the execution of the ready-to-win effect is favorably increased by favorably recognizing the vibration of the operating means. be able to.

A timing T3 during execution of a ready-to-win performance of a normal ready-to-win when a vibrating performance is to be executed at one of the timing T1 at which the variable display of decorative patterns is started and the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win is established; The vibrating effect may be executed at either timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach. In that case, the vibration duration and luminescence color of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation performed at the timing T3 and the timing T4 are lower than the vibration duration and luminescence color of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation performed at the timing T1 and the timing T2. In other words, the timing T3 is such that the reliability of the vibration performance performed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 does not fall below the reliability of the vibration performance performed at the timing T1 or the timing T2. Alternatively, the execution pattern of the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing T4 may be restricted. For example, when the vibration effect of execution pattern SE2 is executed at timing T1, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE5 is executed at time T3, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE8 is executed at time T4, limit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the credibility of the big win reliability from being lowered when the vibration effect is executed a plurality of times in one variable display.

When the vibration performance interlocking with the foretelling performance is executable, the mode of the vibration performance interlocking with the foretelling performance and the mode of the vibration performance not interlocking with the foretelling performance may be different. For example, in the vibration effect interlocked with the advance notice effect, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the music played in the interlocked advance notice effect. Further, for example, in the vibration effect linked to the character object announcement effect, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with the effect sound when the character object moves. Further, for example, in the vibration effect interlocked with the advance notice effect, the push button 31B is caused to emit light in a color different from the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect not interlocked with the advance notice effect. According to such a configuration, when the vibration performance is executed, it is possible to make it easy to recognize whether the vibration performance is linked with the advance notice performance or not linked with the notice performance. .

A present box presentation may be made executable. In that case, when the present box is opened, a character holding a hammer may pop out from the opened present box as shown in FIG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten expectations for execution of the visual guidance effect and the vibration effect due to the execution of the present box effect.

When it is possible to execute an operation effect for operating the push button 31B, in this operation effect, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid during the operation valid period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, The push button 31B may be illuminated. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a mode different from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect. For example, when the push button 31B is lit in the vibration effect, the lighting mode for the vibration effect may be controlled so that the push button 31B emits red light continuously for three seconds during which the push button 31B is vibrated. . On the other hand, when the push button 31B is lit in the operation presentation, the button operation switches the push button 31B between red light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (light off) every 150 milliseconds during the operation valid period. You may control so that it may become the lighting mode for a suggestion. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. It should be noted that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in order to notify that the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is valid during the lever operation valid period in which the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is valid. In this case, control may be performed so that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A emits light during the lever operation valid period, so that the lighting mode for suggesting lever operation is obtained. The lighting mode for suggesting lever operation may be the same lighting mode as the lighting mode for suggesting button operation, or may be a lighting mode different from the lighting mode for suggesting button operation.

For example, when the special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B or the like is operated by the player to set the volume of the effect to be executed, the type of music or background to be output, and the image display. Settings related to effects, such as brightness settings of the device 5 and brightness settings of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, may be changeable. It should be noted that, for example, it may be possible to select which effect setting is to be changed from the menu screen, or a different operation is performed corresponding to the change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to the operation is changed. You may do so. Further, when the special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B may be lighted in order to notify that the setting regarding the effect can be changed. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a mode different from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation and the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the operation presentation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify that the setting regarding the effect can be changed.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 10SH)
In relation to the characteristic portion 10SH, there has been proposed a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player and that can execute a vibration effect in which an operation means that the player can operate vibrates (for example, Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2019-051075).

Generally, a player plays a game while looking at display means on which variable displays and various effects are displayed. Therefore, when the operation means is out of sight of the player, there is a possibility that the player cannot recognize that the operation means is vibrating even if the vibration effect is executed. In that case, it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration presentation.

Therefore, in order to make the game means pay attention before the vibration effect is executed and to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect, the game machine of the means 1 related to the characteristic part 10SH is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player. A machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player), an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the pachinko machine 1 can be controlled by the player is provided with a push button 31B capable of performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation, etc.), and a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates), and a line-of-sight guidance effect execution means that can execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operation means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the player's (e.g., it is possible to execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the line of sight to the push button 31B), and the advantageous state is controlled when the vibration effect is executed rather than when the vibration effect is not executed. (For example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a higher jackpot reliability when the vibration performance is executed than when the vibration performance is not executed), and the vibration performance executing means , at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing, the vibration effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display of the decoration pattern at the timing T1 and the second timing after the first timing). , a timing T2 at which the reach is established, a timing T3 after the timings T1 and T2, during which the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach is being executed, and a timing during the execution of the ready-to-reach performance of the super ready-to-win. (e.g., at any one of T4 and T4, the vibration effect can be executed), regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the vibration effect is performed in a common manner. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 is either timing T1 or T2, or either timing T3 or T4, regardless of (e.g., the vibrating effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time and the light emitting color of the push button 31B are the same), the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing ( For example, the production control CPU 120 does not execute the visual guidance production at the timing T1 and the timing T2, etc.), and can execute the visual guidance production before the vibration production is executed at the second timing (for example, , the effect control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the operation means before the vibration effect is executed, and to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

The gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 10SH is the gaming machine of the means 1, wherein the vibration performance executing means can execute the vibration performance while the visual guidance performance is being executed (for example, performance control For example, the CPU 120 may be able to execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

According to such a configuration, since a sense of unity is generated between the vibration presentation and the line-of-sight guidance presentation, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The game machine of means 3 related to the characteristic part 10SH is a specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is , being able to execute a reach effect of super reach, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , the vibrating effect can be executed when the reach effect of super reach is being executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the vibration effect may be executed while the specific effect is being executed, the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means 4 relating to the characteristic part 10SH is a display means for displaying in any of the game machines of means 1 to 3 (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 has an image display device 5 that displays various effect images. and the like), and the display of the visual guidance effect has a lower priority than the display of the predetermined information and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information (for example, the visual guidance effect display image has lower priority than constant small patterns, pending number display, and various error notifications, and higher priority than pending display, active display, background image, decorative pattern, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect stand out while suitably ensuring the visibility of the predetermined information when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

The game machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 10SH is the game machine of any one of the means 1 to 4, wherein the vibration performance execution means is the vibration performance of the first mode and the advantageous state more than the first mode. (For example, the production control CPU 120 vibrates the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and vibrates the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds. and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. When the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit red light is executed than when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed. ), when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second mode is more likely to be executed than the vibration effect of the first mode (for example, pachinko game In the machine 1, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds rather than vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and lighting the push button 31B in white. At the same time, the vibration effect of making the push button 31B emit red light is easier to execute, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect of the second mode.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 10SH may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way or individual features that are not combined may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other features.

(Description of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 12-1 shows a configuration example of a rendering device relating to characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for presentation serving as a movable presentation device is provided in front of the lower end, which is the lower edge on the front side overlapping the display screen of the image display device 5 . The movable body 32 may be connected to an operation motor via a link mechanism, for example. The movable body 32 can be changed between an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting power from the operation motor. The movable body 32 may be capable of changing its position by power from, for example, an operating solenoid or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 has a frame and a window. The frame portion of the movable body 32 is configured using a decorative member, and has a configuration that can be covered so that the display screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the player. The window portion of the movable body 32 is made of transparent glass or synthetic resin, or formed as a simple opening, and has a see-through structure so that the player can visually recognize the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the upper frame lamp 9C, a plurality of LEDs forming the left frame lamp 9M, and a plurality of LEDs forming the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the game area in the gaming machine frame 3 . The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position on the left side of the game area in the gaming machine frame 3 . The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position on the right side of the game area in the gaming machine frame 3 .

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the lever lamp 9B1 and a plurality of LEDs forming the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of a plurality of LEDs incorporated in the operating rod (operating lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. Part or all of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be made of a translucent member. As a result, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A can be illuminated by lighting the lever lamp 9B1. Also, the push button 31B can be illuminated by turning on the button lamp 9B2.

For example, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are integrally formed, and by driving the vibration motor 131, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can vibrate. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or close to the push button 31B, may be built in the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, or may be provided at the base position of the operation lever. A plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided in order to diversify the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B.

In the pachinko game machine 1, as a suggestive performance suggesting that the variable display result becomes "big hit" at a predetermined rate and controlled to a big win game state, an operation part performance including a light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance can be executed. In the vibration effect included in the operation part effect, the vibration motor 131 is driven to vibrate the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in a vibration mode corresponding to the vibration pattern. In the light emission effect included in the operation part effect, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit light along with the vibration effect by lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. In the light emitting effect included in the operation part effect, lighting of one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 causes one of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to emit light along with the vibration effect. good too. For example, by turning on only the button lamp 9B2, only the push button 31B may emit light along with the vibration effect.

FIG. 12-2(A) shows a setting example of an operation part effect pattern used for executing an operation part effect. In this setting example, operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance as a plurality of operation unit effect patterns. Emission color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and application are set for each operation part production pattern. The light emission color corresponding to the operation part effect pattern indicates the light emission mode when the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation part effect. A vibration pattern corresponding to the operation part effect pattern indicates a vibration mode when the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate in the vibration effect included in the operation part effect. The big win reliability corresponding to the operation part performance pattern indicates the rate of control to the big win game state with the variable display result becoming "big win" when the operation part performance corresponding to the operation part performance pattern is executed. The application corresponding to the operation part effect pattern indicates the timing at which the operation part effect is executed for each operation part effect pattern.

The operation part effect can be executed at a plurality of timings associated with the progress of the variable display, such as, for example, when the pre-variation starts, when the target variation starts, when the reach is established, when the reach develops, and when the winner is announced. The preliminary change start time is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation unit effect. The target variation start time is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation unit presentation. When the ready-to-win state is established, the timing corresponds to the case where the variable display is in the ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win development time is a timing corresponding to the case where the developing effect is executed along with the ready-to-win effect of the super reach. The development effect is a effect for notifying that the ready-to-reach effect of super reach is executed after the ready-to-reach effect of normal reach is executed (development of reach). The timing of winning/failure notification incitement corresponds to the timing corresponding to the winning/failure notification performance before the success/failure notification performance for informing whether or not the variable display result becomes a ``jackpot'' during execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 12-2(A), a plurality of operating part effect patterns that can be used for executing operating part effects corresponding to a plurality of timings are prepared in advance. Further, it is set so that different operation part effect patterns can be used according to a plurality of timings at which the operation part effects can be executed.

When the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is executed, the reliability of big win is higher than when only the ready-to-win performance of normal ready-to-win is executed and the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is not executed. Depending on whether or not the ready-to-win performance of super-reach is executed to derive the determined decoration pattern of the big-hit combination, it is possible to inform whether or not to be controlled to the big-hit game state. As for the reach performance of the super reach, a plurality of reach performances including, for example, the SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having different effects from each other. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having a common effect mode. The decision ratio when the variable display result is "jackpot" and the decision ratio when the variable display result is not "jackpot" are set so that the reliability of the jackpot depends on each reach production. Just do it. Using a random value for determining the variation pattern, depending on the variation pattern determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table, presence or absence of reach production, presence or absence of reach production of super reach, production mode in reach production, etc. It would be nice if it could be set.

Regardless of the specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display, such as the ready-to-win effect, the operation part effect is executed at a predetermined rate depending on whether the variable display result is a "big hit" or not. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of An operation part effect that can be executed regardless of such a specific effect is also called a single operation part effect. On the other hand, there is a case where an effect is executed in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated or vibrated in association with the specific effect. The production by light emission or vibration associated with such a specific production is also called a specific interlocking production.

FIG. 12-2(B) shows a setting example when executing a specific interlocking effect. In this setting example, when executing a specific interlocking effect with a plurality of specific effects such as movable body operation, image display, music playback, or jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 in the reach effect of SP reach A Emission color and vibration pattern are set. The emission color in the specific interlocking effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the control lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be made to emit light as part of the specific effect. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be vibrated as part of the specific effect. Thus, since the specific interlocking performance can be executed as a part of the specific performance, the big win reliability is common to the specific performance, and the unique big win reliability is not set. The vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect is included in the special vibration effect that can be executed along with execution of the specific effect. The operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the light emission of the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect are included in the specific light emitting effect that can be executed along with the execution of the specific effect.

The reach performance of the SP reach A may be, for example, about 40% of the jackpot reliability. The jackpot type lottery CH1 may be a drawing effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type with the minimum number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds). The jackpot type lottery CH2 may be a lottery effect that can be executed when the number of rounds is the second jackpot type with the maximum number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds). Incidentally, the jackpot type lotteries CH1 and CH2 may be a lottery performance related to the jackpot type according to the presence or absence of time reduction control and variable probability control after the jackpot game state is finished, and the end conditions, or may be previously notified in the jackpot game state. A lottery effect relating to the presence or absence of a rank-up and the amount of increase in which the number of rounds is greater than the number of rounds may be used. As jackpot type lotteries CH1 and CH2, based on the game ball that has entered the V prize opening of the V prize attacker, when it is possible to control the probability variable state after the jackpot game state is over, whether or not the V prize attacker is opened and the opening time. , The number of times of opening, or depending on the termination conditions of the variable probability control, etc., it may be possible to execute a lottery effect related to the jackpot gaming state with different advantages. When it is possible to control from a small winning game state to a big winning game state based on the occurrence of V winning by the game ball entering the V winning attacker, whether or not the V winning attacker is opened, the opening time, the number of times of opening, or Depending on the number of rounds of the big win game state controlled after the occurrence of the V prize, it may be possible to execute a lottery effect related to the small win game state and the big win game state with different degrees of advantage.

Until a game state in which the V winning attacker can be released is started, control is performed in a weak vibration monitoring state, and after that, from the start of the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released, the V by entering the game ball into the V winning attacker. During the period until a prize is won, the strong vibration monitoring state may be set, and the control lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be controlled so as not to vibrate. Then, when a V prize is generated, control may be performed to the weak vibration monitoring state, and an effect including vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which vibration errors are easily detected, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is more difficult to detect vibration errors than in the strong vibration monitoring state. During a period when there is a high possibility of fraud due to the generation of vibration by a player, control is performed to a strong vibration monitoring state. On the other hand, during a period in which there is little risk of cheating due to the player generating vibration, control is performed to the weak vibration monitoring state. When a vibration error is detected, by the control of the effect control CPU 120, etc., the display of the warning image, the output of the warning sound, the lighting of the warning lamp, the output of the warning signal, or a combination of some or all of these, It is sufficient if the control for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality can be executed. When a vibration error is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 may control the CPU 103 of the pachinko game machine 1 to stop the game. As a result, it is possible to appropriately monitor the vibration and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the notification of the vibration error or the game stop state due to the inappropriate abnormality determination.

FIG. 12-3 shows the setting contents of the vibration pattern. A plurality of vibration patterns are prepared in advance according to the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. FIG. 12-3(A) shows vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used for executing vibration effects included in the operation part effects. FIG. 12-3(B) shows vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used for executing the special vibration effect included in the specific interlocked effect.

The vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which the ON period and the OFF period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 that can be executed at the start of the preliminary fluctuation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time of starting the preliminary fluctuation. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light becomes white along with the vibration effect.

The vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed at the start of the preliminary fluctuation. Also, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation part effects that can be executed at timings different from the start of the preliminary variation and the start of the target variation. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC02, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes red. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC03, the light emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes rainbow. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

The vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the operation part presentation by the vibration pattern AKV03 is not included in the operation part presentation that can be executed at a timing different from the target variation start time. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC12, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes red. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC13, the light emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes rainbow.

In the vibration pattern AKV11, the ON period vibration mode is matched with the effect AKR1 when the ready-to-win state is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation part effects that can be executed at a timing different from when the ready-to-win state is established. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21, the light emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes pink.

In the vibration pattern AKV12, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period in accordance with the effect AKR2 when the ready-to-win state is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from when the ready-to-win state is established. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes orange.

As the vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the ready-to-win state is established, the vibration effect included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time when the ready-to-win state is established and the effect by a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21 executable when ready-to-win is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22 executable when ready-to-win is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there is a case where the vibration mode of the vibration presentation is common between the operation section presentation executed when the ready-to-win state is established and the operation section presentation executed at the time of the start of the preliminary fluctuation or the start of the target fluctuation. . In this way, when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, the vibration mode of the vibration effects is common, so that the increase in the control load of the effects and the control data may be prevented.

In the vibration pattern AKV21, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period according to the production AKS1 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation part effects that can be executed at a timing different from the reach development time. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC31, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

In the vibration pattern AKV22, it becomes a vibration mode of the on period in accordance with the production AKS2 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation section presentation that can be executed at a timing different from the reach development time. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC32, the light emission color in the light emission effect in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light with the vibration effect becomes white.

As the vibration effect included in the operation part effect at the time of reach development, the vibration effect included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development and the effect with a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed when the reach develops, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executed. In these cases, there is a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation part effect executed when the reach develops and the operation part effect executed when the pre-variation starts or when the target change starts. . In this way, when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, the vibration mode of the vibration effects is common, so that the increase in the control load of the effects and the control data may be prevented.

The vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds or longer. For example, after the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the ON period continues until the player's action that operates the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is detected in the effective detection period. I wish I could. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41 that can be executed at the time of winning/failure notification. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation part effects that can be executed at a timing different from the time of the victory/failure notification. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41, the luminescence color in the light emission effect in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light with the vibration effect becomes gold.

It should be noted that whether or not to provide an effective detection period when the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed may be changed according to the type of effect to be executed with the variable display, such as the type of ready-to-win effect. good. When providing an effective detection period, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are switched between gold light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (lighting out) every 150 milliseconds so that the light emission mode is for suggesting operation. may be controlled. If the effective detection period is not provided, control may be performed so that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is continuously illuminated in gold for a period of time during which the operation lever or the push button 31B is vibrated, so that the light emission mode for vibration effect is performed. On the other hand, when providing an effective detection period, it is suggested to switch the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B between emitting (lighting) and non-emitting (turning off) a red color different from gold every 150 milliseconds. You may control so that it may become the light emission mode for. By executing a light emission effect in a light emission mode that switches between light emission and non-light emission every 150 milliseconds, it is possible to confirm that the operation of operating the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is effective while executing the vibration effect. , can be suggested to the player. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp layers in which lamp control data can be set may be used to differentiate the priority of light emission control. For example, in the first lamp layer, as a lighting mode for suggesting normal operation, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are switched between red lighting (lighting) and non-lighting (lighting out) every 150 milliseconds. Set the lamp control data to In the second lamp layer, as a light emission mode for suggesting a special operation, lamp control data is set in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are continuously illuminated in gold for an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds. do. Then, the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is performed rather than the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. Prioritize execution. As a result, the light emission mode for suggesting a special operation may be controlled to have a higher priority than the light emission mode for suggesting a normal operation.

A plurality of ready-to-win performances to be super ready-to-win may include a strong SP ready-to-win with a relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP ready-to-win with a relatively low big-hit reliability. In the ready-to-win effect of the strong SP reach, the hit/fail notification effect is executed after the action detection effect is executed by detecting the action of the player operating the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. When the vibration effect corresponding to the reach effect of such a strong SP reach is executed, it is turned on until the player's action to operate the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is detected during the effective detection period. It is sufficient if the vibration mode is such that the period continues. In the ready-to-win effect of the weak SP reach, the win/fail notification effect is executed without executing the motion detection effect. When the vibrating effect corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect of such a weak SP reach is executed, the vibrating mode according to the vibration pattern AKV31 may be set 1500 milliseconds or more before the win/fail notification effect. A case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration presentation is different between the operating part presentation when the ready-to-reach presentation of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation presentation when the ready-to-reach presentation of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated continuously for 5000 milliseconds, which is the effective detection period. You may control to the vibration mode used as a period. Alternatively, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled to switch between a period and an OFF period in which vibration is not performed. On the other hand, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the weak SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are continuously vibrated for 2000 milliseconds. You may control to a vibration mode. A case may be provided in which the lighting mode of the lighting effect is different between the operating part effect when the ready-to-win effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the ready-to-reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a light emission effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in gold every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. It may be controlled so that the light emission mode is switched between (lighting) and non-lighting (extinguishing). On the other hand, as a light emission effect included in the operation part effect when the low SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated continuously for 2000 milliseconds. The control lever and the push button 31B may be controlled to emit gold light.

In the vibration pattern AKV41, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period interlocked with the movable body operation in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In the vibration pattern AKV42, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period interlocked with the screen display in the SP reach A reach performance. In the vibration pattern AKV43, it is a vibration mode of the ON period interlocked with the music reproduction in the SP reach A reach effect. The vibration pattern AKV44 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 3000 milliseconds or longer.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV41 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movable body motion in the reach effect of SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movable body motion in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes blue as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV42 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the SP reach A reach effect. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the light emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes gold as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV43 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the SP reach A reach effect. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emitting effect changes from blue through red to gold as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate.

Vibration by the vibration pattern AKV44 is a special vibration performance included in the specific interlocking performance executed together with the announcement of the confirmation of the big hit, and a special vibration performance included in the specific interlocking performance executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2. There are cases and cases. In the specific interlocking effect that is executed together with the announcement of the confirmation of the big hit, the emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes rainbow as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, the emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes white as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH2, the light emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes rainbow as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate.

FIG. 12-4 shows an execution example of an effect by vibrating and emitting light on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Here, a plurality of effect execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown according to the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the emission color of the push button 31B. It should be noted that the lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B are in the normal light emission state with the light emission brightness set to be low, and the color of the light emitted. It suffices if the light is emitted so as to be white. Alternatively, in the normal light emission state, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to non-light emission.

Effect execution example AKA01 is a case of executing a lighting effect in which the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit white light. In the case of executing the operation part presentation by any one of the operation part presentation patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the emission color becomes white. The operation part effect pattern AKC01 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the preliminary variation. The operation part effect pattern AKC11 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the target change. Both of the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when the operation part effect is executed when the reach is developed. The operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31 and AKC32 all have a jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC01 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC11 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC31 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV21. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC32 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV22. Also when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed as the specific effect, the light emission color is white.

Effect execution example AKA02 is a case of executing a light emission effect in which the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit red light. In the case of executing the operation part effect by either the operation part effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12, the light emission color becomes red. The operation part effect pattern AKC02 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the preliminary variation. The operation part effect pattern AKC12 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the target change. The operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC02 and AKC12 all have a jackpot reliability of 70% or more. The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC02 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation part presentation by the operation part pattern AKC12 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when the music reproduction of the SP reach A is executed as the specific effect, the effect period in which the light emitting color is red is included.

Effect execution example AKA03 is a case of executing a lighting effect in which the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit rainbow colors. In the case of executing the operation part effect by either of the operation part effect patterns AKC03 and AKC13, the light emission color becomes rainbow. The operation part effect pattern AKC03 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the advance variation. The operation part effect pattern AKC13 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the target change. The operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC03 and AKC13 all have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC03 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC13 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV03. Also when executing the jackpot decision notification or the jackpot type lottery CH2 as the specific effect, the light emission color becomes rainbow.

Effect execution example AKA04 is a case of executing a luminescence effect in which the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit pink light. In the case of executing the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21, the light emission color becomes pink. The operation part effect pattern AKC21 can be used when the operation part effect is executed when the reach is developed. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21 has a big hit reliability of 100%. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC21 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV11.

Effect execution example AKA05 is a case of executing a light-emitting effect in which the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit orange light. In the case of executing the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22, the light emission color becomes orange. The operation part effect pattern AKC22 can be used when the operation part effect is executed when the reach is developed. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22 has a big hit reliability of 100%. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC22 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV12.

Effect execution example AKV06 is a case of executing a light emission effect in which the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit blue light. When executing the operation section effect, the emission color never turns blue. When executing the movable body action of SP reach A as the specific effect, the light emission color becomes blue. In addition, even when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as the specific effect, the effect period during which the light emitting color is blue is included.

Effect execution example AKV07 is a case of executing a light-emitting effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in gold. When executing the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41, the light emission color becomes gold. The operation part effect pattern AKC41 can be used when the operation part effect is executed at the time of winning/failure notification. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41 has a big hit reliability of 100%. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC41 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV31. When the image display of SP reach A is executed as the specific effect, the light emission color becomes gold. In addition, even when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as the specific effect, the effect period in which the luminous color is gold is included.

As described above, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the light emitting color of the push button 31B may differ or may be common depending on the execution timing of the operation section effect, the reliability of the big hit, and the vibration mode in the vibration effect. In addition to the light emission color, for example, the light emission time, the number of light emission (number of blinks), the light emission cycle (blink cycle), the light emission brightness, etc., can be used to determine the execution timing of the operation part production, the reliability of the jackpot, and the vibration in the vibration production. Depending on the mode, they may be different or common.

The operation part effect can be executed as a pre-reading forewarning effect or a continuous forewarning effect when it is executed at the start of the preliminary fluctuation. The pre-reading advance notice effect suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" before the variable display to be suggested. The continuous advance notice effect continuously indicates whether or not the result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" over a plurality of variable displays executed before the variable display to be suggested. A continuous advance notice effect can be executed using a continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories. The number of reserved memories here may be the number of special figure reserved memories at the time of starting winning. As the continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories, a plurality of continuous effect patterns are prepared in advance according to the effect mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the number of special figure reservation storage at the time of starting winning, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display to be suggested is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

FIG. 12-5 shows a setting example of a continuous effect pattern used for executing the continuous advance notice effect. For the continuous effect pattern, for example, using a random number value for determining the continuous effect pattern, refer to the continuous effect pattern determination table according to the number of pending memories, and according to the winning determination result, the determined value that matches the random value is assigned. It may be determined by judging the determination result that is given.

FIG. 12-5(A) shows continuous effect patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the reserved storage number is "2". In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD01, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC11 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous announcement effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD02, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD03, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC02 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD04, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous announcement effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD05, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC02 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD06, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC03 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed.

FIG. 12-5(B) shows continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the reserved storage number is "3". In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation section effect is executed by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, and the remaining number of times is "0". When , an operation section effect is executed by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13.

FIG. 12-5(C) shows continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the reserved storage number is "4". In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is any one of "1" to "3", the operation part effect by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is When it is "0", the operation part effect by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 12-6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition for enabling the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, which is a continuous notice effect. In step AKS101, it is determined whether or not the effect control command (starting entrance winning designation command, pending memory number notification command, winning determination result command) transmitted at the time of starting winning has been received. If no command is received, it is determined that the pre-reading notice condition is not met. When there is a command reception, the content of notification by the received command is specified, and for example, the result of judgment at the time of winning is specified as the content of notification by the judgment result command at the time of winning.

The determination result at the time of winning determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and whether or not the variation pattern is determined to be a specific variation pattern, using the game random numbers extracted at the start of the winning. , The result determined by the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process may be used. As the judgment result at the time of winning, for example, any one of the big win, determination of super reach at the time of loss, determination of reach at the time of loss, and general at the time of loss may be indicated. The determination result at the time of winning a big hit is a determination result corresponding to the case of being controlled to the big win game state corresponding to the case where the random number for determining the display result is within the big win determination range. Winning judgment result of super reach determination at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled to the jackpot game state, and corresponds to the case where the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of super reach determination at the time of loss This is the judgment result. Winning determination result of reach determination at the time of loss is included in the determination result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled to the jackpot game state, and the determination result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach determination range at the time of loss is. If the judgment result at the time of general winning at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled to the jackpot game state, and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the confirmation range of super reach nor within the confirmation range of reach at the time of loss is a determination result corresponding to

It is sufficient if the pre-reading notice condition can be satisfied when the result of determination at the time of winning is either a big win or a determination of super reach at the time of loss. In addition, if the judgment result at the time of winning this time is either a big hit or a super reach determination at the time of loss, and the judgment results at the time of winning up to the previous time corresponding to the pending memory are all general at the time of loss, the pre-reading notice condition can be established. In addition, in the case where the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, which is a continuous notice effect, is already set to start, the pre-reading notice condition may be restricted so as not to be satisfied.

If the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied (step AKS101; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice (step AKS102). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the execution of pre-reading notice, and referring to a pre-reading notice execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the result of determination at the time of winning, Whether or not to execute the advance notice effect may be determined as the presence or absence of the advance notice execution. At step AKS102, it is determined to be either "not executed" when the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed, or "executed" when the pre-reading notice effect is executed. Regarding the determination result at this time, it is determined whether or not it is determined to be "executed" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not to be executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect is to be executed (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). At step AKS104, the number of pending memories may be set as the remaining number of times. Subsequently, a continuous effect pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a continuous effect pattern, and referring to a continuous effect pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the winning determination result, the continuous effect pattern is generated. should be determined as one of a plurality of patterns.

After the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105, setting during pre-reading notice is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. In step AKS106, for example, a pre-reading notice in-progress flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (production control flag setting section, etc.) may be set to the ON state.

In such pre-reading notice setting processing, when the judgment result at the time of winning is either a big win or a super reach at the time of losing, the pre-reading notice condition in step AKS101 can be satisfied, and the pre-reading notice execution in step AKS102 is possible. It becomes possible to determine the presence or absence of a continuous effect pattern by step AKS105. When the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit, even if it is decided to "execute" to execute the pre-reading notice effect by step AKS 102 at a higher rate than in the case where the judgment result at the time of winning is determination of super reach at the time of loss. good. In addition, in step AKS105, when the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit, the continuous effect pattern may be determined at a rate different from the case where the judgment result at the time of winning is determination of super reach at the time of loss. In this way, it is only necessary to be able to execute the continuous announcement effect, which is the prefetch announcement effect, based on the winning determination result, which is the prefetch determination result.

FIG. 12-7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S171 of FIG. 9 as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 12-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol (step AKS201). The effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern based on the variable display contents such as the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command and the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11. You just have to decide. When the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, the variation pattern designation command and the display result notification command are set to send the command at the start of the variation of the special symbol. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the performance control board 12 . The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random number value for special figure display result determination. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (losing)", "reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". I wish I had.

If the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display state of the decorative pattern will not be in the ready-to-win state, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a "failure". When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", after the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, the determined decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "losing". becomes. When the variable display content is "unprobability variable (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the big win game state is a time saving state. When the variable display content is "variable probability (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the end of the big win game state becomes the variable probability state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "unprobability variation (big hit)", a combination of the same even-numbered symbols as the final stop symbol is determined. In addition, when the variable display content is "probability variation (big hit)", it is sufficient if the combination of fixed decorative symbols with the same odd number symbols can be determined as the final stop symbol. If the variable display content is "reach (loss)", a combination of fixed decoration symbols that will be a combination of reach loss as the final stop symbol is determined. When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", a combination of fixed decoration symbols that is a non-reach losing combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When determining the combination of fixed decoration patterns, for example, numerical data that is a random number value for design determination is extracted, and according to the variable display content, by referring to a prepared pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, What is necessary is just to determine the stop design of the decoration design.

After determining the final stop pattern, etc., the operation part presentation is determined (step AKS202). At step AKS202, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading announcement effect is being executed. For example, when the pre-reading notice flag is ON, it may be determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. When the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed, the remaining number of times is subtracted by 1, and the operating part effect pattern is determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the continuous effect pattern. The continuous effect pattern determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading notice setting process may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM122. If the remaining number of times after the subtraction is "0", the pre-reading notice in-progress flag should be cleared and turned off.

In step AKS202, if it is determined that the pre-reading announcement effect is not being executed, the presence or absence of the operation part effect and the operation part effect pattern corresponding to the variable display of this time may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation part effect is extracted, and depending on whether or not the variable display result is a "jackpot", a prepared operation part effect determination table stored in advance in the RAM 121 is referred to. It is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of operation part effects, ie, whether or not to execute the operation part effects, and the operation part effect pattern to be used when executing the operation part effects. The operation part effect corresponding to the variable display this time becomes executable when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed, and it becomes unexecutable when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. . Therefore, the operating part effect corresponding to this variable display is limited so that it cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display within the range of the variable display in which the operating part effect included in the pre-reading notice effect is executed. There is a limit set.

In step AKS202, when a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect is executed along with the specific effect based on the variation pattern, execution of the operation part effect may be restricted. For example, when the ready-to-reach effect of SP reach A is executed, execution of the operation part effect may be restricted by determining not to execute the operation part effect at any timing. In this case, within the range of the variable display in which the ready-to-win effect of the SP reach A is executed, a limitation is provided as a limit so that all the operation part effects cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. Alternatively, when the reach performance of SP reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation part performance at a predetermined ratio at the timing corresponding to the start of target fluctuation or the establishment of reach, while at the time of development of reach or Execution of the operation part presentation may be restricted by determining not to perform the operation part presentation at the timing corresponding to the winning/failure notification. In this case, within the range of the variable display in which the SP reach A ready-to-reach effect is executed, a limitation is provided so that some operation part effects cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display. . In addition, in the range of variable display in which a specific effect is executed, a limit may be provided so that part or all of the operation section effect is difficult to execute while the variable display is being executed. Thus, the effect control CPU 120 that determines the operation part effect in step AKS202 can limit the execution of the operation part effect including the vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed.

Note that, in the case where the operation section effect is determined in step AKS202, when a special effect different from the specific effect is executed based on the variation pattern or the result of determination at the time of winning, more than when the special effect is not executed. A determination ratio of the operation part effects may be set so that part or all of the operation part effects are likely to be executed during execution of the variable display.

After determining the operation part effect, one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step AKS203). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (variable display effect control pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as the usage pattern. . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (operation part effect control pattern) corresponding to the operation part effect determined in step AKS202, and sets it as a usage pattern. good. Also, for example, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set (step AKS204). Then, the variation of the decoration pattern or the like is started on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (variable display effect control pattern) determined in step AKS203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the image The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the display device 5.

After setting the start of the variable display, settings are made for updating the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the pending display, etc., the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step AKS207), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 12-8 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The production control pattern includes a variable display production control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8(A) and an operation unit production control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8(B). The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) executes various effects from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command. contains control data used to control the The operation part effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8(B) includes control data used for controlling the execution of the operation part effect.

The variable display effect control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, effect control process timer judgment value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end code, etc. . The production control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the production control process timer value, which is the stored value of the production control process timer, and is a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of each production operation. is preset. In place of the production control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined production control command is received from the main board 11, or a prescribed process is executed as a process for controlling the production operation in the production control CPU 120. Data indicating switching timing of effect control, etc., may be set corresponding to predetermined control contents and processing contents.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 . The audio control data includes data indicating the output mode of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects linked to the variable display of decorative patterns. That is, the audio control data is data that designates audio output operations from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the light emission driving mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern for light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. That is, the lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that designates the light emission mode of the light emitter during the variable display of the decoration pattern.

The operation detection control data includes, for example, an effective detection period for effectively detecting a player's operation, such as a tilting operation on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation on a trigger button, or a pressing operation on the push button 31B, and each operation. Data indicating the effect operation mode according to the detection of the player's motion, such as data designating the control contents of the effect operation when is effectively detected, is included. The vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of the decoration pattern. That is, the vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that designates the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the variation pattern.

It should be noted that these control data are not necessarily included in all the production control patterns, but production control patterns that include some control data according to the content of the production operation by each production control pattern. There may be Further, in the plurality of types of process data included in the production control pattern, the types of control data forming each process data may differ according to the content of the production operation executed at each timing. That is, some process data includes all of display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, and some process data includes some of these data. you can Furthermore, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

In the production process during variable display in step S172 of the production control process process, each time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches with any of the production control process timer determination values, and if it matches controls performance operations according to various corresponding control data. Thus, the effect control CPU120, according to the contents of the process data #1 ~ process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, light emitters such as decorative LEDs, vibration motor 131, movable body 32, etc.) are progressed. In each process data #1 to process data #n, display control data #1 to display control data #n, voice control data #1 to voice control, which are associated with effect control process timer determination values #1 to #n Data #n, lamp control data #1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data #1 to operation detection control data #n, and vibration control data #1 to vibration control data #n control the performance operation of the performance device. Effect control execution data #1 to effect control execution data #n that indicate the contents and specify the execution of effect control are configured.

The operation part effect control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, effect control process timer judgment value, lamp control data, vibration control data and the like. The lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitters in the operation part effect, such as the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. That is, the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern is data specifying the lighting mode when the operation lever of the stick controller 31B and the push button 31B are caused to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation part effect. The vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern includes data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration generator in the operation part effect, such as driving of the vibration motor 131 . That is, the vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern is data specifying the vibration mode when vibrating the operation lever of the stick controller 31B and the push button 31B in the vibration effect included in the operation part effect.

FIG. 12-9 shows a setting example of the timing at which the operation section effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE01. Timings AKT01 to AKT03 correspond to the start of the variable display of decorative symbols as the preliminary variation, and are timings at which the operation section presentation at the start of the preliminary variation can be executed. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading notice setting process, depending on the remaining number of times, the operation part effect is executed at some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at which the advance fluctuation starts. be able to. For example, when the remaining number of times is "3", the operation section effect can be executed at the timing AKT01, and when the remaining number of times is "2", the operation section effect can be executed at the timing AKT02, and the remaining number of times can be executed. is "1", it is possible to execute the operation section effect at the timing AKT03.

Timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 12-9 corresponds to the start of the variable display of the ornamental pattern as the target variation, and is the timing at which the operation section effect at the start of the target variation can be executed. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading notice setting process, the operation part by the operation part effect pattern according to the remaining number of times at some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the timing of the advance fluctuation start At the timing AKT11 when the object variation starts after the execution of the effect, the operation part effect according to the operation part effect pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times "0" can be executed. Also, at the timing AKT11, which is the time when the target variation starts, there is a case where the operation part effect can be executed. Specifically, when any one of the operation part effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is determined in step AKS202, the operation part effect by the determined operation part effect pattern is executed at the timing AKT11, which is the target variation start time. be able to.

Timings corresponding to the start of the variable display of decorative patterns, such as timings AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, may be capable of executing the operation section effect at the same time as the variable display of decorative patterns is started. , it may be possible to execute the operation section effect when a certain period of time has passed since the variable display of the decoration pattern was started. In this way, the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative design may be any timing that can be reached by the start of the variable display of the decorative design.

Timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in Fig. 12-9 are the operation part effects corresponding to the variable display this time. It is the timing when each can be executed. For example, according to the operation part effect pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, the operation part effect can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and the operation part effect can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed. can be executed, and there are cases where the operation section effect can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing of the success/fail notification. Specifically, in step AKS202, when one of the operation part production patterns AKC21 and AKC22 is determined, at timing AKT12 when reach is established, the operation part production pattern is executed according to the determined operation part production pattern. can be done. Further, when either of the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 is determined in step AKS202, the operation part effect by the determined operation part effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the ready-to-win situation develops. Alternatively, when the operation part effect pattern AKC41 is determined in step ASK202, the operation part effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing of the success/failure notification.

FIG. 12-10 shows a control example of the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white shown in FIG. 12-10(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in FIG. It can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the timings when the pre-variation starts. As shown in FIG. 12-10(B), the vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 12-10(A), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. In the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned off and extinguished. The light emission effect in which the light emission color changes to white according to the ON period of the vibration effect is, for example, a first luminance with a high white light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds during an on period of 300 milliseconds. may be alternately repeated to periodically change the luminance of the white light.

FIG. 12-11 shows a control example of the operation part presentation by the operation part presentation patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC02 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes red shown in FIG. 12-11(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. It can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the timings when the pre-variation starts. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC03 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes rainbow color shown in FIG. 12-11(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 12-11(B). , at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start times of the pre-variation. The vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period of 1500 milliseconds continues, as shown in FIG. 12-11(B). As shown in FIG. 12-11(A), the light emitting effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are continuously red in the operation part effect pattern AKC02 in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. If it is the operating section effect pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the plurality of LEDs that make up the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light with red, reddish purple, bluish purple, blue, green, yellow, and orange transitions according to the elapsed time and the light emitting position. , the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 should emit rainbow colors. As for the light emitting positions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, it is possible to specify a plurality of sections, for example, the upper and lower portions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2. All or part of the luminance can be set.

FIG. 12-12 shows a control example of the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white shown in FIG. 12-12(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. It can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the time when the target variation starts. The vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period of 1500 milliseconds continues, as shown in FIG. 12-12(B). As shown in FIG. 12-12(A), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. The light emission effect in which the light emission color changes to white according to the on period of the vibration effect is, for example, a first luminance with a high light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds during the on period of 1500 milliseconds. may be alternately repeated to periodically change the luminance of the white light.

FIGS. 12-13 show control examples of the operation part presentation by the operation part presentation patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes red shown in FIG. 12-13(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. It can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC13 includes the light emission effect in which the emission color becomes rainbow color shown in FIG. 12-13(A) and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 12-13(B). , at timing AKT11, which is the time when the target variation starts. The vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the ON period of 3000 milliseconds continues, as shown in FIG. 12-13(B). As shown in FIG. 12-13(A), the light emitting effect associated with this vibration effect is intermittent with the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently red if the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is matched with the ON period of the vibration effect. , and if it is the operating section rendering pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit rainbow colors. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 alternately repeat a first luminance with a high red emission luminance and a second luminance with a low emission luminance every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the vibration effect, thereby emitting red light. The brightness may change periodically. In this case, the light emission effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 changes the light emission brightness at a shorter cycle than the light emission effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11. becomes. As described above, as a rendering mode of the lighting rendering, not only the lighting color but also the lighting period may be changed so as to indicate the reliability of the big win. Note that red light may be emitted intermittently by alternately repeating red light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the vibration effect. As an effect mode of the light emission effect, while the light emission cycle is common, the light emission color may be made different to indicate the reliability of the big win. In this way, for example, when the luminescent colors in the luminous effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the luminous effect by standardizing the luminescence cycle.

FIGS. 12-14 show control examples of the operation part effects by the operation part effect pattern AKC21. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21 can be executed in response to the effect AKR1 which becomes the effect when the reach is established shown in FIG. 12-14(C) includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes pink and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in FIG. 12-14(C). The effect AKR1, which is the effect when the ready-to-win state is established, may be, for example, the effect of displaying a effect image showing the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or the effect of displaying a background image corresponding to the establishment of the ready-to-win state. In addition, any production associated with establishment of reach may be used. As shown in FIG. 12-14(C), the vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which ON periods and OFF periods are alternately repeated a plurality of times every predetermined time (for example, 100 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 12-14(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit pink light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. In the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned off and extinguished.

FIGS. 12 to 15 show control examples of the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22 can be executed in response to the effect AKR2 which becomes the effect when the ready-to-win state is established shown in FIG. 12-15(C) includes a light emission effect in which the emission color is orange, and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 shown in FIG. 12-15(C). The effect AKR2, which is the effect when ready-to-win is established, may be, for example, a effect of displaying an effect image showing the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or an effect of displaying a background image corresponding to the establishment of ready-to-win. In addition, any production associated with establishment of reach may be used. It is sufficient that the effects AKR1 and AKR2, which are effects at the time of establishment of ready-to-win state, have different effects. As shown in FIG. 12-15(C), the vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV12 is an ON period of the first vibration ON time (eg 100 milliseconds) and an OFF period of the first vibration OFF time (eg 100 milliseconds). After two alternating repetitions, a vibrating mode comprising an on period of a second vibrating on time (eg, 250 ms) and an on period of a third vibrating on time (eg, 500 ms). As shown in FIG. 12-15(B), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit orange light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. In the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned off and extinguished. In addition, when the ON period of the vibration effect is different from the vibration ON time, the light emission pattern of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be changed. For example, during the ON period of the first vibration ON time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit orange light. On the other hand, during the ON periods of the second vibration ON time and the third vibration ON time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit orange light. The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit orange light by alternately repeating orange light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the second vibration ON time and the third vibration ON time. do it.

The operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed corresponding to the effects AKS1 and AKS2 which are the effects when the reach develops at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops, and the luminous effects in which the emission color becomes white. , and a vibration performance by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In the case of the operation part production pattern AKC31, the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV21 becomes a vibration mode of the ON period corresponding to the production AKS1. In the case of the operation part production pattern AKC32, the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV22 becomes a vibration mode of the ON period according to the production AKS2. As for the light emission effect associated with these vibration effects, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect in any of the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32.

The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41 can be executed corresponding to the win/fail effect at the timing AKT14 when the win/fail notification effect is performed. ,including. The vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the ON period is 1500 milliseconds or longer. In the light emitting effect associated with this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit gold light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect.

As shown in FIGS. 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. , and when the emission color is red or iridescent, which is different from white, and when the emission color is white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or iridescent. In this case, a vibration effect is executed by a vibration pattern AKV03 different from the vibration pattern AKV02. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs between when the luminescent color is white and when the luminescent color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. To improve amusement in a game by properly diversifying performances. It should be noted that, in both the case where the luminescent color is red and the case where the luminescent color is iridescent, the common vibration pattern AKV03 is used for vibration presentation. In other words, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the case where the luminescent color is red and the case where the luminescent color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be common regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start time of the target variation, include the operation part effects with the operation part effect pattern AKC11, and the execution of the light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white with the vibration effect with the vibration pattern AKV02. I'm in. Operation part effects that can be executed at timing AKT13 when reach develops include operation part effects using operation part effects patterns AKC31 and AKC32. contains something In this way, the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts and the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops become white, which is the common emission color, and the vibration effect are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common, whereas the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is used. To improve amusement in a game by properly diversifying performances. Note that the operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start time of the target variation, include the operation part effects that use the operation part effects patterns AKC12 and AKC13, and the lighting effects that make the emission color red or rainbow. there is As in this case, the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts and the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops are different in the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the vibration effect may also have different vibration modes. As in the case where the light emission color becomes white, the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts is different from the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. Including what they have in common. Further, as in the case where the light emission color becomes red or rainbow, the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts is the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. The effects may include different lighting modes. The operation part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the ready reach develops does not have to include the lighting mode of the light emission effect different from the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts.

At the timing AKT12 when reach is established, the operation part effects that can be executed are the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emission effects that change the light emission color to pink or orange with the vibration effects of the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. All of these operating part effects have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing of the winning/failure notification, include the operation part effects with the operation part effect pattern AKC41, and the light emission effects that change the light emission color to gold along with the vibration effect with the vibration pattern AKV31. I'm in. This operating part presentation has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the operation part performance executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation part performance executed at the timing AKT14 when the success/failure notification is inflated, the reliability of the big hit is 100% in common, and the vibration performance are different. In addition, the operation part effect executed at timing AKT12 when the ready-to-win state is established and the operation part effect executed at timing AKT14 when the win/fail notification is inflicted have different emission colors and different vibration modes of the vibration effects. In this way, when the timings for executing the operation part effects are different, the reliability of the big hit is common, but the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, or the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, so that the stick controller 31A , and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to enhance the amusement of the game.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, are the operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13. Includes those that perform lighting effects. At the timing AKT12 when reach is established, the operation part effects that can be executed are the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emission effects that change the light emission color to pink or orange with the vibration effects of the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. In this way, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts and the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and the vibration of the vibration effect. A case where the mode is different is provided. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different. It is possible to improve the game interest.

At the timing AKT12 when reach is established, the operation part effects that can be executed are the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emission effects that change the light emission color to pink or orange with the vibration effects of the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops include the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC31 and AKC32, and the light emission effects that change the emission color to white with the vibration effects with the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. contains things. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the operating part effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operating part effect performed at the timing AKT13 when the ready reach develops, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect. There are different cases. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part production is different, the lighting mode of the lighting production is different, or the vibration mode of the vibration production is different. Appropriate diversification can improve game interest. Note that the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the ready-to-win state is established may include execution of a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes white. Further, the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed may include execution of a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes pink or orange. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, even if the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different. Appropriate diversification can improve game interest.

The jackpot reliability when the operation part performance is executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 which are the timings of the start of the advance fluctuation is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation part performance pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation part performance is executed at the timing AKT11 which is the target variation start time is any one of 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% according to the operation part performance pattern. The reliability of the big hit when the operation part performance is executed at the timing AKT12 when the ready-to-win state is established becomes 100% regardless of the operation part performance pattern. The reliability of the jackpot when the operation part performance is executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed is 50% or more regardless of the operation part performance pattern. The reliability of the big hit becomes 100% when the operation part presentation is executed at the timing AKT14 which is the timing of the success/failure notification. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation section effect is executed may differ depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing when the vibration effect is executed. Further, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. Note that the vibration mode of the vibration presentation includes the duration of the vibration corresponding to the length of the ON period, the vibration intensity by driving the vibration motor 131, the combination of the ON period and the OFF period, the combination of strong vibration and weak vibration in the vibration intensity, and others. , the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and other arbitrary vibration patterns for vibrating the operation members.

A plurality of specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game include movable body motion, image display, music reproduction, big win determination notification, and big win type lotteries CH1 and CH2 in the reach performance of SP reach A. The reach effect of the SP reach A has, for example, a jackpot reliability of about 40%. Therefore, when the vibration performance by the operation part performance is executed, the reliability of the big win becomes higher than when the reach performance of the SP reach A is executed, and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state when it is executed is high. Become. Movable body motion, image display, and music reproduction in the ready-to-win effect of SP reach-A are all executed as part of the ready-to-win effect, so they do not individually have the reliability of big hits. Also, the big hit decision notification is an effect for definitely notifying that the variable display result will be a "big hit". The jackpot type lotteries CH1 and CH2 are jackpot type lottery effects corresponding to the number of rounds, etc., corresponding to the case of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot confirmation notification and jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 are similar to the reach performance of SP reach A in that the player can recognize without a doubt that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the game state is controlled to the jackpot. It is different from the production having a big hit reliability. In this way, among a plurality of specific performances, the reliability of the big win is higher when the vibration performance by the performance of the operating part is executed than when the specific performance is executed with respect to the specific performance having the reliability of the big win. It should be set as follows. Further, the reliability of the big hit is set to be higher when the vibration performance by the operation part performance is executed than when the vibration performance by the operation part performance is not executed.

FIGS. 12 to 16 show an execution example of an effect by lighting the game effect lamp 9. FIG. The game effect lamps 9 include an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M and a right frame lamp 9N which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Here, a plurality of production execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown according to the execution mode of the production by light emission.

In the effect execution example AKF01, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a white display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit white light in accordance with the background display. , the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in red by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. For example, the operation part effect by either the operation part effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color changes to red along with the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF02, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit red light corresponding to the background display. , the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in rainbow colors by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. For example, the operation part effect by either the operation part effect pattern AKC03 or AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes rainbow with the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white from left to right, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are displayed in the background display. In addition, the control lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. For example, the operation part effect by any one of the operation part effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white with the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF04, when the character display on the image display device 5 is displayed in blue, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit blue light in accordance with the character display. , the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in white by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. For example, the operation part effect by any one of the operation part effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white with the vibration effect.

For example, the background display and character display of the image display device 5, and other predetermined effects by displaying an arbitrary effect image can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display of decorative symbols. In the effect process during variable display executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to perform variable display, etc. Control is performed to execute a predetermined effect in accordance with the progress of the game. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, and lamp control data for controlling the light emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N. there is During execution of such a predetermined effect, when the operation part effect is executed, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, and the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation part effect is performed. can emit light in the following light emission mode. In the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, the control data read from the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to control the operation part effect. Execution control is performed. The control data includes lamp control data for controlling the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data for controlling the vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B by driving the vibration motor 131. It is included. In response to the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in such an operation part effect, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect of the operation part effect according to the predetermined effect. is. In this way, the operating members such as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and the other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit light in different manners. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production by and improve the game interest.

In addition to the screen display of the image display device 5, or instead of the screen display of the image display device 5, the predetermined effect may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this case, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit light in an emission color that matches the sound output such as BGM, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated. Light may be emitted in the light emission color of the light emission effect in the part effect. For example, when the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a message that gives the player an impression of red color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit red light corresponding to the sound output. On the other hand, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be illuminated in white by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. Even in this way, the operation members such as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and the other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can be made to emit light differently. , it is possible to appropriately diversify the production by light emission and improve the amusement of the game. The predetermined effect is to darken the screen display of the image display device 5, stop the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and turn off the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. may be When this predetermined effect is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be vibrated by the vibration effect in the operation part effect. By executing the operation part effect during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the player's attention is further increased to the vibration effect of vibrating the operation member such as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

FIG. 12-17 shows a setting example of an effect period in which a specific interlocking effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in accordance with the action of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ01 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit blue light accompanying the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed along with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ02 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit gold in accordance with the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed along with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ03 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the color of light emitted from the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B changes from blue through red to gold in accordance with the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43. .

The period AKZ04 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed along with the notification of the determination of the big hit. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ04 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the control lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit rainbow colors in accordance with the special vibration effect of the vibration pattern AKV44. The notification of the confirmation of the big hit includes stopping display of the confirmed decorative pattern which is the display result of the decorative pattern, display of a scene in which the friend character wins the battle with the enemy character in the ready-to-win effect, the speaker 8L, By outputting a notification sound indicating the confirmation of the big win by 8R, lighting the notification lamp of the confirmation of the big win included in the game effect lamp 9, or by combining some or all of these, the player can arbitrarily recognize the big win. It is sufficient if it is a case of executing the notification of.

It should be noted that, following the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 which is the time of winning notification, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ04 associated with the notification of the determination of the big hit may be executed. In this case, the impression of the performance can be enhanced and the amusement of the game can be improved by executing the specific interlocking performance accompanying the announcement of the determination of the big win while the expectation of the player is heightened by the performance of the operation part. When the specific interlocking effect is executed following such an operation part effect, the vibration mode of the vibration effect or the special vibration effect is changed between the operation part effect and the specific interlocking effect, or the light emission effect or the specific light emission effect is changed. The light emission modes may be varied. For example, the vibration intensity may be different between the vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The light emission luminance may be different between the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. To make it possible to easily recognize the distinction between the operation part performance and the specific interlocking performance by making the vibration mode and the light emission mode different to give a sharpness to the performance, appropriately diversify the performance, and improve the amusement of the game. can be done.

The period AKZ05 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in association with the jackpot type lotteries CH1 and CH2. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is a specific emission in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit white light in accordance with the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed. Includes performances. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is that when the big win type lottery CH2 is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the emission color of the push button 31B become rainbow colors in accordance with the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes lighting effects.

FIGS. 12-18 to 12-20 show the case where SP reach A reach effect is executed. FIGS. 12-18 show production execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when movable body motions in SP reach A reach production are executed. FIGS. 12-19 show production execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when image display is executed in the SP reach A reach production. FIG. 12-20 shows production execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when music reproduction is executed in the SP reach A reach production.

The position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position when the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win state and the ready-to-win performance of the normal ready-to-win is executed. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be any position that is in front of the lower end of the display screen of the image display device 5 . Subsequently, when the ready-to-win effect of the SP reach-A is started due to the reach development, the position of the movable body 32 is changed from the initial position as in the effect execution example AKG01, and the movable body action is performed. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by upward linear movement or parallel movement from the initial position. An effect image showing a message such as “Reach A” is displayed. Thereafter, as the position of the movable body 32 continues to be changed, the position of the movable body 32 passes through the vicinity of the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the effect execution example AKG02. At this time, at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window portion of the movable body 32, an effect image showing a message such as "This change is..." is displayed.

Along with the position change of the movable body 32 that becomes the movable body motion as in the performance execution examples AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking performance is executed, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effect executed together with the movable body motion in the reach effect of SP reach A includes a special vibration effect with vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emission effect in which the emission color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 12-17. , contains Further, when the position of the movable body 32 continues to be changed and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front of the upper end of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the example of execution of the effect AKG03, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ01 ends. do. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches from the front of the lower end to the front of the upper end of the display screen, which is the initial position, is 2500 milliseconds. A special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode in which the lever or the push button 31B is vibrated during the ON period. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, the special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode that switches between an ON period in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate every 250 milliseconds and an OFF period in which they do not vibrate. Further, the specific light emission effect may be executed in a light emission mode in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is caused to emit blue light continuously over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light emission effect is executed in a light emission mode in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is switched between blue light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (extinguishing) every 250 milliseconds. good too.

When the movable body motion in the reach effect of SP reach A such as the effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 is executed, the position of the movable body 32 of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N is changed, for example. The light may be emitted in a light emission pattern in which the light emission color and light emission brightness gradually change from the lower side to the upper side as the light is emitted. For example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N emit blue light when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, and the light emission luminance changes in a wave-like manner according to height and time. It is sufficient to emit light in such a manner as to

After the movable body motion is completed as in the effect execution example AKG03, the effect image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the effect execution example AKG11 as the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. At this time, for example, the character display indicating the message "Extremely hot" is displayed in gold color. In addition, as in effect execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added around the character display and displayed.

Along with the display of the effect image that becomes the image display such as the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the specific interlocking effect is executed, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effect that is executed along with the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A is, during the period AKZ02 shown in FIGS. contains. When the character display indicating the message ends and the display of the effect image in the ready-to-win effect different from the character display is started as in the effect execution example AKG13, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ02 ends. Note that, for example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the character display indicating the message "Super hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated continuously over this period AKZ02. You may perform special vibration production in a mode. Further, during the period AKZ02, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are operated in a light emitting mode in which a first brightness with a high gold emission brightness and a second brightness with a low emission brightness are alternately repeated every 10 milliseconds. A specific light emission effect may be executed.

When the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A such as the effect execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. The light emission color should be gold in accordance with the image display and the light emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. For example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N emit gold in accordance with the display of the effect image that becomes an image display such as the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, and the light emission color becomes gold, as in the effect execution example AKG13. When the display of the effect image is started, light may be emitted in a color different from gold.

After the display of the effect image as in the effect execution example AKG13 is started, the sound of the music phrase PH01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as in the effect execution example AKG21 as music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A. Subsequently, as in the effect execution example AKG22, the sound of the music phrase PH02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. After that, as in production execution example AKG23, the sound of music phrase PH03 is output from speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, by sequentially outputting the sounds of a plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 in accordance with the progress of the production, it is sufficient that the entire musical composition can be reproduced in the SP reach A reach production.

Along with the output of the sound for music reproduction, such as the production execution examples AKG21 to AKG23, a specific interlocking production is executed, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A is a special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV43, the light emission color changes from blue to red, and further and a specific lighting effect that changes from red to gold. In the effect execution example AKG21, a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes blue is executed in response to the sound output of the music phrase PH01. In the effect execution example AKG22, a specific light emission effect is executed in which the light emission color becomes red in response to the sound output of the music phrase PH02. In the effect execution example AKG23, a specific light emission effect is executed in which the light emission color becomes gold in response to the sound output of the music phrase PH03. In this way, it is only necessary to execute a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color changes to a plurality of colors as the sounds of a plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 are sequentially output according to the progress of the effect.

FIG. 12-21 shows a case where the musical scale changes in order as the performance progresses as a music reproduction execution example AKH01. In this case, as shown for example in FIG. Sounds corresponding to the scale are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the scale of do that is output last may be one octave higher than the scale of do that is output first.

Such a specific interlocking effect that accompanies music playback includes a specific lighting effect in which the light emission color changes as shown in FIG. Vibration effect that is a vibration effect is included, and can be executed in a period AKZ03 corresponding to music reproduction. The vibration effect shown in FIG. 12-21(C) is a vibration mode in which ON periods and OFF periods are alternately repeated multiple times in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale. As shown in FIG. 12-21(B), the specific light emission effect associated with this special vibration effect is performed by lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale and the ON period of the special vibration effect. The color of the emitted light changes in order between blue, red, and gold. The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are extinguished during the stop period of the sound output and the OFF period of the special vibration effect. It should be noted that, during the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale, the lighting mode of the specific lighting effect may be changed for each scale. For example, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to emit blue light continuously for a period corresponding to the scale of Do, which is output first. Next, during the period corresponding to the re scale, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to emit light in a lighting mode that alternately repeats a first luminance with a high red emission luminance and a second luminance with a low emission luminance. After that, during the period corresponding to the mi scale, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to emit light in a light emission mode that switches between gold light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (extinguishing). In this way, by adopting a light emission mode in which the light emission amount differs for each light emission color corresponding to each musical scale, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects and improve the amusement of the game.

The reach effect of SP reach A is controlled to be executable by using the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) is based on lamp control data and vibration control data, and is accompanied by specific effects such as movable body movement, image display, and music playback in the reach effect of SP reach A. It is set to be able to execute a specific interlocking effect. In the specific interlocking effect, a special vibration effect can be executed by any one of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The special vibration effect by any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern in the operation part effect are different in vibration mode. In this way, the vibration mode is different between the vibration effect in the operation section effect that can be executed regardless of the specific effect and the special vibration effect in the specific interlocking effect that can be executed in accordance with the execution of the specific effect. It is possible to appropriately diversify the performance using the operation member such as the push button 31B, thereby improving the game interest.

When executing the operation part effect, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated using the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 along with the vibration effect of vibrating the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A light emission effect is executed. When the specific interlocking effect is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are operated using the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 along with the special vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. A specific light emission effect that emits light is executed. By executing an effect including vibration and light emission of operation members such as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, can enjoy the image display and the image display. By recognizing the vibration and light emission of different operation members, the unexpectedness of the production is enhanced.

In the period AKZ01 shown in FIGS. 12-17, the movement of the movable body 32, which is the movement of the movable object in the reach performance of the SP reach A, makes it possible to execute the specific interlocking performance including the special vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV41. In this way, by executing the special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby improving the game interest.

In the period AKZ04 shown in FIGS. 12-17, along with the notification of the determination of the big hit, the specific interlocking performance including the special vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed. In this way, the special vibration performance can be executed along with the notification of the control to the jackpot game state, thereby appropriately diversifying the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby improving the game interest. be able to.

The specific interlocking effect includes a specific light emitting effect by emitting light from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 along with the special vibration effect by any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. A light emission mode such as a light emission color is different between the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation part effect and the specific light emission effect accompanying the special vibration effect in the specific interlocking effect. In this way, by differentiating the light emitting mode according to the operation part effect and the specific interlocking effect, the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are appropriately diversified, and the game interest is improved. can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the start times of the preliminary fluctuation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. , and the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, a vibration effect is executed according to the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIGS. 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. and cases where the emission color is red or iridescent, which is different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and when the emission color becomes red or iridescent. , the vibration effect is executed by the vibration pattern AKV03. Therefore, the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that is the start of the preliminary fluctuation and the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 that is the start of the target fluctuation. As well as being different, the vibration mode is also different. In addition, the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT01 that is the start time of the preliminary fluctuation and the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 that is the time of the start of the target fluctuation, and the light emission color is white and red. By becoming one of the rainbow colors, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, while the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common. It is possible to appropriately diversify the performance using the member and improve the game interest.

Vibration effects of operation part effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start times of advance fluctuations, are executed at timing AKT11, which is the start time of target fluctuations, based on the result of winning judgment, which is the result of pre-reading judgment. Executed in the variable presentation prior to the variable presentation to be executed. In this way, by varying the timing at which the operation part effects are executed, the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push buttons 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the game interest can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the start times of the preliminary fluctuation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. , and the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, a vibration effect is executed according to the vibration pattern AKV02. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs between when the luminescent color is white and when the luminescent color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. To improve amusement in a game by properly diversifying performances. It should be noted that, in both the case where the luminescent color is red and the case where the luminescent color is iridescent, the vibration effect by the common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration presentation is common between the case where the luminescent color is red and the case where the luminescent color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be common regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous effect pattern used for executing the continuous advance notice effect is an operation part effect pattern in which the light emission color in the light emission effect differs depending on whether the remaining number of times is other than '0' or when the remaining number of times is '0'. There are things that contain For example, the continuous effect pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 12-5(A) includes an operating part effect pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1" and an operating part effect pattern AKC12 when the remaining number of times is "0". , contains The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC01 includes a light emission presentation in which the emission color is white. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the light emission effect that is accompanied by the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 that is the start of the target fluctuation , the light emission mode is different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different. A game interest can be improved.

In the continuous performance pattern used for executing the continuous advance notice performance, the reliability of the big hit of the operation part performance pattern corresponding to the small number of remaining times is higher than the reliability of the big win of the operation part performance pattern corresponding to the large number of remaining times. is set to prevent it from becoming degraded. For example, in the continuous effect pattern shown in FIG. 12-5(A), if the operating part effect pattern AKC02 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operating part effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0" , so as to prevent the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. If it is the operation part effect pattern AKC03 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part effect pattern AKC11 or the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is assumed as the operation part effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". configured to prevent As a result, even though the operating part performance with high reliability of the big win is executed first at the start of the advance fluctuation, the performance of the operating part with low reliability of the big win is prevented from being executed later at the start of the target fluctuation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without lowering the player's expectations.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the start times of the pre-variation, the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect is the light-emitting color. When the light emission color becomes white, and when the light emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the light emission color becomes white, it emits light according to the ON period and OFF period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. and non-light emission are repeated, and when the light emission color becomes red, light is continuously emitted in accordance with the ON period of the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIGS. 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. When the luminous color is white, it emits light according to the ON period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02, and the luminous color changes to red. In this case, light is emitted intermittently according to the ON period of the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV03. Since the setting of the ON period is different between the vibration effects by the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, the light emission mode such as the light emission period in the light emission effect is different. Even in this way, it is sufficient if the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different when the timing of executing the operating part effect is different.

(Modified example of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation section effects, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of vibration effects, the light emission mode of light emission effects, and the reliability of big wins can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like.

With respect to the performance of the operation part, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the reliability of the big win may be changed according to the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1, or the settings of the pachinko game machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the value. Regarding the specific interlocking performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the set values of the pachinko game machine 1, or the pachinko game machine 1. may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value of . In addition, regarding the operation part effects, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the reliability of the big win may be varied according to an arbitrary degree of advantage regarding the game in the pachinko game machine 1, Different ratios may be determined according to such advantages. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the reliability of the big win may be changed according to the arbitrary advantage of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, Different ratios may be determined according to such advantages.

When the timing of executing the operation part production is different and common, when the vibration mode of the vibration production is different and common, and when the light emission mode of the light emission production is different and common, the reliability of the big hit is increased. The combination of each case, such as the case of being different and the case of being common, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. When the execution timing is different or common between the operation part production and the specific interlocking production, When the vibration mode of the vibration production and the special vibration production is different and common, When the light emission production and the specific light emission production The combination of each case, such as the case of different and the case of being common, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. In addition, when the vibration mode of vibration production|presentation differs, the light emission mode of light emission production|presentation should just be made common, and the control burden of light emission production|presentation can be reduced. When the light emitting modes of the light emitting effects are different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the vibration effect can be reduced by standardizing the vibration mode of the vibration effect. When a part of the vibration mode in the vibration performance is different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the vibration performance can be reduced by sharing the other vibration modes in the vibration performance. For example, when vibration intensities in the vibration presentation are different, the vibration period in the vibration presentation may be made common, thereby reducing the control burden of the vibration presentation. When part of the light emission mode in the light emission effect is different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the light emission effect can be reduced by standardizing the other light emission modes in the light emission effect. For example, when the luminescent colors in the luminous effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the luminous effect by standardizing the luminescence period in the luminous effect. As for the vibration mode of the special vibration effect and the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, it is sufficient if the control load can be reduced by similar commonality.

In addition to the execution of the variable display, or instead of the execution of the variable display, when it is controlled to an arbitrary game state such as a small winning game state or a big winning game state, an operation part performance or a specific interlocking performance is executed. It may be possible. For example, when it is controlled in a small winning game state, a predetermined ratio is determined according to whether or not the V winning attacker is opened, the opening time, the number of times it is opened, or the number of rounds of the big winning game state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning. It may be possible to execute the operation section effect with . When it is controlled to the jackpot game state, the presence or absence of time reduction control and probability variable control after the jackpot game state is finished, the end condition, and the number of rounds increased from the number of rounds previously notified in the jackpot game state. Depending on the presence or absence, the amount of increase, or the like, it may be possible to execute the operation section effect at a predetermined ratio. It may be possible to execute a specific interlocking effect along with a specific effect such as movable object operation, image display, and music reproduction in the small winning game state or the big winning game state.

The specific effect capable of executing the specific interlocking effect may be any effect that can be executed according to the execution of the variable display, or any effect that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike the ready-to-win effect, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big win" at a predetermined rate and a suggestive effect suggesting control to the big win game state is executed, specified during a part or all of the effect period It may be possible to execute an interlocking effect.

When controlled to an arbitrary production state, the operation section production or the specific interlocking production may be made executable. For example, when it is controlled to a production state that is a special production mode, the operating part production and specific interlocking production are executed at a higher rate than when it is controlled to a production state that is a production mode different from the special production mode. It may be possible.

The operation member capable of executing the effect by vibration or light emission may be any motion detection member configured to be capable of detecting the motion of the player. For example, it may be a sensor that detects an operation on a jog dial that can be rotated, or a sensor that detects a touch operation or a press operation on a touch panel. Also, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. A predetermined camera may be used to photograph the player's hands, etc., and the results may be analyzed (video motion capture) to detect the actions of the player. In addition, any configuration that can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined action by a player may be used. Along with such an action detection member, a contact member that a player can contact with a hand or the like may be provided, and the contact member may vibrate or emit light together with the action detection member or separately from the action detection member. .

The vibration effects included in the operation part effect can correspond to the vibration effect in the characteristic portion 48AK, the predetermined vibration effect in the characteristic portion 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the characteristic portion 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation part effects, the vibration effects included in the operation part effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at which the pre-fluctuation starts can correspond to the first vibration effects in the feature part 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation part effects, the vibration effect included in the operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at which the target variation starts can correspond to the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. The light emission effects included in the operation part effect are the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the characteristic portion 48AK, the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect in the characteristic portion 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the characteristic portion 50AK. It can correspond to light emission production. Of the light emission effects included in the operation part effects, the light emission effects associated with the vibration effects included in the operation part effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at which the preliminary fluctuation starts are the light emission associated with the first vibration effects in the feature part 50AK. Able to handle performances. Among the light-emitting effects included in the operation part effects, the light-emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect included in the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts is the light-emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. can cope. The special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect can correspond to the special vibration effect in the characteristic portion 49AK.

In addition, in each characteristic part and modification described above, regarding the transition to the time saving state (high base state), there is a form to shift via the big hit state or small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is always operated. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a time saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the time saving state (high base state) is displayed without operating the special variable winning ball device 7 ).

In addition, as the above-described time-saving patterns, these time-saving patterns may be used as part of the losing pattern or may be used as part of the small winning pattern.

In addition, when performing the lottery processing related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a special random number for the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processing, or the lottery random number of the lost pattern and the big hit pattern The lottery may be performed using random numbers for other lotteries such as lottery random numbers for small winning symbols, random numbers for judging big win lottery, and lottery random numbers for falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving patterns may be a plurality of types of patterns, and may be used together with a combination of patterns displayed as other patterns, such as a small winning pattern or a losing pattern. In addition, in this case, whether or not to transition to the time saving state may be determined by a small winning symbol used in combination. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

In addition, in the case of performing the lottery of the time-saving design, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving design does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving design in all the setting values are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different probabilities between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Also, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing time-saving symbols, even when using a dedicated random number or when using another random number, the starting port (first starting winning port, 2nd starting prize opening) is acceptable.

In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, when using a special random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the lottery of the time-saving design is a small hit design. When a random number is used, a specific small hit pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when the random number for the falling lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, the random number for the falling lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time-saving design may be won when the game ball passes through the time-saving area.

In addition, when the lottery of the time saving pattern is performed using a structure, when the small hit pattern uses the time saving pattern in combination, the variable display number of the time saving state (the number of time saving) does not change depending on whether the time saving area passes to

In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, if random numbers are used for the lottery of time-saving patterns, a specific random number will be the winning value. A jackpot pattern random number value can be used as a winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability will vary depending on the settings, so it is possible only if the set values cannot be changed.

Further, the judgment timing of the lottery result of the time saving pattern may be executed at the timing after the big hit judgment. In addition, the time-saving pattern lottery is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, without executing it in the time-saving state (high base) or high probability, regardless of which random value is used for the lottery. . However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each game machine.

In addition, as for the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined times of time saving according to the winning value (symbol) and each game state. Moreover, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

Moreover, when the number of times of time saving differs according to the time saving pattern, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can change the allocation lottery of the time saving pattern.

Further, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result of "zero number of times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

Also, a derivation lottery for time saving end patterns (time saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times of time saving may be the number of times until the time saving end patterns are derived and displayed after the start of time saving or until the big win patterns are derived and displayed. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the time when the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small win pattern random number is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, and when the small win is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small win operation.

In the case of lottery using structures, the timing of control to the time-saving state is the timing of the completion of the operation of the structures in the game state (for example, small winning state) in which the structures are operated.

In addition, in the case of a game machine controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit (so-called specified number of times probability variable machine (ST machine)), a high probability low base state at the opening of the game hall , and after the high-probability low-base state is executed a specified number of times of variable display and ends, control may be performed to the time-saving state.

In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed when the time saving limiter function is installed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated.

Also, the design fixing time of the time saving pattern may be different from the design fixing time of the other patterns.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 48AK)
A game machine capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, comprising an operation means operable by the player, a vibration performance executing means capable of executing a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates, and an operation means accompanied by the vibration performance. and a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect to emit light, and when the vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the vibration effect is not executed, and the vibration effect Depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different, and the vibration of the vibration effect is generated according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. The mode is different. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The operating means may be, for example, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 according to the vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203, for example. The fact that the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the pattern of the operation part effect. The fact that the ratio of control to an advantageous state differs according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed means that, for example, the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern and the big hit according to the use of the operation part effect pattern. Reliability, etc. may be used. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different depending on the light emission mode of the light effect, for example, if the emission colors and vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation part effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 are used.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, or the like.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display changes to the reach mode may be timing AKT12, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing at which the notification effect for informing whether or not the control is to be performed in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first light emitting. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different between the case where the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode and the case where the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is red or iridescent. The difference in the vibration mode may be, for example, the case of the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode have a common light emission mode of the light emission effect, Vibration modes may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The different vibration mode may be, for example, the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have a common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. Aspects may vary. Here, the fact that the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is common may be, for example, the case where the reliability of the big hit is 100%. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is in the ready-to-reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the difference in light emission mode may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange colors. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration performance executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-win state and the vibration performance executed at the timing for executing the development performance after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach state. Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The game machine comprises a first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the vibration effect is executed at the time, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting effect according to the predetermined effect. There may be. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, or the like. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be display of a background image or a character image, for example. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, the image display device 5 or the like. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the lighting modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means is provided, and the vibration effect execution means performs the vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. , the vibration effect can be executed, and regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode, and the line of sight guidance effect executing means is capable of executing the line of sight at the first timing It may be possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing without executing the guidance effect. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L and 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. A common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, at timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3. If the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
With such a configuration, the vibration of the operation means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 49AK)
A game machine capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, comprising an operation means operable by the player and a vibration performance capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance and a special vibration performance as vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates. Execution means, light emitting effect executing means capable of executing light emitting effect of causing operation means to emit light according to predetermined vibration effect, and specific effect executing means capable of executing specific effect according to the progress of a game, wherein the predetermined vibration effect is provided. The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when is not executed, and the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the predetermined vibration performance and the timing when the predetermined vibration performance is executed The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs according to, the vibration performance executing means can execute the special vibration performance with the execution of the specific performance, and the vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. . Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The operating means may be, for example, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 according to a vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. Just do it. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203, for example. The specific effect may be, for example, reach effect of SP reach A, big hit determination notification, big hit type lottery, and the like. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the pattern of the operation part effect. The fact that the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed is, for example, based on the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern and the use of the operation part effect pattern. It may be a big hit reliability or the like. The fact that the special vibration effect can be executed may be, for example, the execution of the vibration effect during periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. Vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 may be used for the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect, for example.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, or the like.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display changes to the reach mode may be timing AKT12, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win state. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing at which the notification effect for informing whether or not the control is to be performed in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the light emission effect is the first light emission mode. The vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different between when it is performed in the light emission mode and when the light emission effect is performed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is red or iridescent. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode have a common light emission mode of the light emission effect. Yes, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The different vibration mode may be, for example, the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , the vibration mode may be different. Here, the fact that the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is common may be, for example, the case where the reliability of the big hit is 100%. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and a predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode may differ in the light emission mode of the light emission performance and in the vibration mode. Here, the difference in light emission mode may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange colors. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect in accordance with the timing, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display changes to the ready-to-reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing to execute the development effect after the variable display changes to the ready-to-reach mode. . Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It comprises a first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the time, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting effect according to the predetermined effect. It may be possible. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, or the like. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be display of a background image or a character image, for example. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, the image display device 5 or the like. The light emission mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means is provided, and the vibration effect execution means performs at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. , a predetermined vibration effect can be executed, regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the predetermined vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode, and the visual guidance effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect at the first timing , the visual guidance effect may be executed before the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the second timing without executing the visual guidance effect. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L and 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. A common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, at timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3. If the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
With such a configuration, the vibration of the operation means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

The ratio of control to an advantageous state may be higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed. Here, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation level of 50% or more, which is higher than when the SP reach A reach performance is executed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the predetermined vibration effect and improve the game interest.

The specific effect executing means can execute the effect of operating the movable member as the specific effect, and the vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member. Here, the effects for operating the movable member may be, for example, the effects execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV41.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the amusement of the game.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a special vibration effect in response to notification of being controlled in an advantageous state. Here, the notification of being controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot determination notification or the like. The special vibration effect that accompanies this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the amusement of the game.

The light emitting effect execution means is capable of executing a specific light emitting effect of causing the operating means to emit light in conjunction with the special vibration effect, and the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emitting effect associated with the special vibration effect differ in light emission mode. good too. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The different luminescence mode may be, for example, a case where the luminescence color is white, red, or iridescent, rather than a case where the luminescence color changes from blue, gold, or blue to gold via red.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and improve the game interest.

A limiting means may be provided for limiting the execution of the predetermined vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed. Here, the restricting means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 when determining the operation part effect in step AKS202.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the vibration effect and improve the game interest.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 50AK)
A game machine capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and capable of executing a first vibration performance and a second vibration performance as a vibration performance in which an operation means operable by the player and the operation means vibrates. A vibration performance execution means and a light emission performance execution means capable of executing a light emission performance for causing the operation means to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance are provided, and when the vibration performance is executed, the vibration performance is more effective than when the vibration performance is not executed. The ratio of control to an advantageous state is high, and the ratio of control to an advantageous state differs according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the timing of execution between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. are different, the vibration mode is also different, and the light emission mode of the light emission performance is common between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The operating means may be, for example, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration effect may be driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, for example. The second vibration effect may be driving the drive motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation part effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13, for example. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203, for example. The fact that the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the pattern of the operation part effect. The difference in the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect may be, for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The difference in the timing of execution between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, pre-variation start timings AKT01 to AKT03 different from the target variation start timing AKT11. The difference in vibration mode between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, vibration pattern AKV01 different from vibration pattern AKV03. The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect, for example, when the light emission colors included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 are white, red, and rainbow colors. and so on.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, the target variation start timing AKT11.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach state. Here, the timing at which the variable display changes to the reach mode may be timing AKT12, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing at which the notification effect for informing whether or not the control is to be performed in the advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is the second light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different between the case where the light emission mode is executed in the first light emission mode and the case where the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is red or iridescent. The difference in the vibration mode may be, for example, the case of the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode. They are common and may have different vibration modes. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The different vibration mode may be, for example, the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the fact that the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is common may be, for example, the case where the reliability of the big hit is 100%. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode are different in the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and even if the vibration mode is different. good. Here, the difference in light emission mode may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange colors. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect in accordance with the timing, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display changes to the ready-to-reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing to execute the development effect after the variable display changes to the ready-to-reach mode have different vibration modes. good too. Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The game machine comprises a first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the second vibration effect is executed in the second vibration effect, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect according to the predetermined effect. It may be possible to emit light at Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, or the like. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be display of a background image or a character image, for example. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, the image display device 5 or the like. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the lighting modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means is provided, and the vibration effect execution means performs at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. , the second vibration effect can be executed, regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the second vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode, and the visual guidance effect execution means is capable of executing the second vibration effect It may be possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect without executing the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing and before the second vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L and 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. A common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, at timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3. If the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
With such a configuration, the vibration of the operation means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the first vibration effect in the variable display before the variable display in which the second vibration effect is executed, based on the result of the prefetch determination. Here, the variable display prior to the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage may be, for example, a variable display that is pre-variable.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect associated with the first vibration effect includes a light emitting mode during the first vibration and a light emitting mode during the second vibration different from the light emitting mode during the first vibration, and the light emitting effect is the light emitting mode during the first vibration. The vibration mode of the first vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in and when the light emission effect is executed in the light emission mode during the second vibration. Here, the first vibrating light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second mode of light emission during vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is red or rainbow. The difference in the vibration mode may be, for example, the case of the vibration pattern AKV01 different from the vibration pattern AKV02.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The light emission mode may be different between the light emission effect accompanying the first vibration effect and the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect. Here, the difference in the light emission mode is, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" according to the continuous effect pattern, the light emission color of the operation section effect pattern is different from that when the remaining number of times is "0". I wish I had.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect and improve the game interest.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic portions. Features that are combined in this way or individual features that are not combined may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other features.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. , operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined vibration effect (for example, a vibration motor with a vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) as a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. 131) and a special vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern). Effect control CPU 120 for executing effect processing during variable display in step S172 using effect control pattern and vibration control data of variable display effect control pattern); For example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emission color included in the operation part production pattern) can be executed (for example, using the lamp control data of the operation part production control pattern determined in step AKS203) (such as CPU 120 for effect control that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172), and specific effects (for example, reach effect of SP reach A, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) can be executed according to the progress of the game. Specific effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes effect processing during variable display in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) and display means (for example, pachinko game machine 1 , image display device 5, etc.), and when the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed ( For example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit production pattern, etc.), the light emission mode of the light emission production accompanying the predetermined vibration production, and the timing at which the predetermined vibration production is executed. Controlled to the advantageous state. The ratio is different (for example, the light emission color included in the operation part production pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the use of the operation part production pattern, etc.), the vibration production execution means executes the special vibration production along with the execution of the specific production. possible (for example, execution of vibration effects in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05, etc.), it is possible to execute the predetermined vibration effects at the timing when the variable display is started (for example, execution of vibration effects at timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.), The vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and the second display area. and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display areas of the image display device 5 are the first display area 20SH51 and the first display area 20SH51 and a second display region 20SH52 that is narrower than the first display region 20SH51, and the display means displays the advantageous state in the first display region and the second display region. can display a background image corresponding to (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.), In the second display area, it is possible to display, in front of the background image, a given amount display related to the given amount of game value (for example, the image display device 5 can display the background image in the second display area 20SH52. (e.g., display of winning number 20SHK related to the number of awarded balls) can be displayed on the front side of the image), and at least in the first display area, the amount of game value to be provided is located on the front side of the background image. A first notification display for notifying that the amount of given game value has reached a first predetermined amount and a first notification display for notifying that the amount of given game value has reached a second predetermined amount as notification display for notifying that the amount of game value has reached the fixed amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display at least in the first display area 20SH51 the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state in front of the background image. Acquisition number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of "Kiriban" has been reached, and when the number of awarded balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the acquisition number notification display "1000 over" is displayed. display is possible, and when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", it is possible to display the winning number notification display of "over 2000", etc.); It is updated each time a game value is given in the advantageous state (for example, the winning number display 20SHK is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), and the notification display is: The display is terminated when a specific period of time has passed since the display was started (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is to be terminated when a predetermined period of time has passed since the display was started), and the notification is made. The characters used for display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the display of the given amount (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK). characters, etc.), and the characters used for the display of the amount to be applied and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, the number of acquisitions display 20 SHK and the number of acquisitions The characters used for the notification display 20SHKH include specific characters forming a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used for the application amount display include the background image from the specific area. is not visible (for example, the specific characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK are such that the background image cannot be seen from a specific area, etc.), and the specific characters used for the notification display are not visible from the specific area. A game machine in which the background image is visible (for example, the background image can be visually recognized from a specific area for the specific characters used in the acquisition count notification display 20SHKH) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect. In addition, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In addition, the display including the specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the background image.

In other words, attention is paid to whether or not the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the execution timing of the light emission mode, the vibration effect, and whether the special vibration effect is executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved, and the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area surrounded by the lines forming the characters, and the characters used for the notification display are used for the display of the applied amount. Since the characters are larger than the characters and the background image is visible from a specific area, the application amount display is always easy to check even though the characters are small, while the notification display indicates that the predetermined amount has been reached. Large characters can be displayed without hiding the background image. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that easily attracts the player's interest when installed in a game arcade and allows the player to easily grasp the amount of game value to be provided and easily recognize that the predetermined amount has been reached.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of the game and displaying a display including specific characters in a suitable manner in relation to the background image, the control is performed in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state, etc.) and display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an image display device 5, etc.). The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area surrounding the first display area and narrower than the first display area (for example, an image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means , the background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display , a background image corresponding to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and a display of the amount of game value that has been imparted can be displayed in front of the background image in the second display area. Yes (for example, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK related to the number of awarded balls in front of the background image in the second display area 20SH52), at least in the first display area a first display for notifying that the amount of given game value has reached a first predetermined amount as a notification display for notifying that the amount of given game value has reached a predetermined amount on the front side of the background image; It is possible to display a notification display and a second notification display that notifies that the amount of game value to be provided has reached the second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least in the first display area 20SH51, On the front side of the background image, the winning number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls given in the big win game state has reached the number of "Kiriban" is displayed, and the number of prize balls given in the big win game state is "1000". When the number of winning balls reaches ``1000 pieces'', it is possible to display the obtained number notification display of ``over 1000'', and when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches ``2000'', the acquisition of ``over 2000'' is possible. number notification display, etc.), and the awarded amount display is updated each time a game value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the winning number display 20 SHK is a winning game ball in a jackpot game state). updated every time a ball is paid out), and the notification display ends when a specific period has passed since the start of display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH starts display). (such as ending the display when a predetermined period has elapsed since), and the characters used for the notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the display of the amount to be given (for example, in the acquisition number notification display 20 SHKH The characters used should be characters of a size larger than the characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions 20 SHK, etc.), and the characters used for the display of the amount to be given and the notification display should be a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. is formed (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.), The specific character used for the display of the amount to be applied is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number display 20SHK is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. etc.), the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used for the notification display (for example, the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH). etc.) gaming machines. Examples of the form examples of these gaming machines will be described below as other form examples.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 042AK)
Next, the game machine in the characterizing portion 042AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of winning balls after a predetermined period of time when the attacker becomes open in the first round game, and the attacker wins within the predetermined period. If not, a predetermined display indicating that the number of winning balls is not increased is performed, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is performed. Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 042AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described in the basic description above will be omitted.

FIG. 13-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1. Main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, lower display lamp 9f (lower left display lamp 9fL, right lower display lamp 9fR), and general winning gate vicinity lamp 9g are all turned on. It is a diagram. In the characteristic portion 042AK of the present embodiment, which will be described later in detail, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, lower display lamp 9f (lower left display lamp 9fL, right lower display lamp 9fR), and general winning gate vicinity lamp 9g are sequentially lit from lower left to lower right. It is possible to suggest to the player that he/she should hit to the right by allowing the player to hit the ball to the right.

FIG. 13-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 13-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is ON (step 042AKS001; Yes), the waiting time for the effect at the start of jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for the effect at the start of the big win may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM102.

Following the processing of step 042AKS002, settings are made for transmitting a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the winning start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the winning start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. should be stored in After that, the jackpot flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS004). In addition, the setting for ending the variable probability state and the time saving state is performed (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, the process of clearing the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to turn it off, and the processing of clearing the special figure variation counter for counting the number of executions of the special figure game in the probability variation state and the time saving state etc. It should be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (step 042AKS006), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

When the big hit flag is off at step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is ON (step 042AKS007; No), the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of a small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the processing of step 042AKS008, similarly to the processing of step 042AKS003, settings are made for transmitting the winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small hit flag is cleared to be turned off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 042AKS011).

Also, when the small hit flag is off at step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). . After executing either of the processes of step 042AKS011 and step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to terminate the variable probability state or the time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure fluctuation number counter (special figure fluctuation number count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, and the special figure fluctuation number count value after the update is predetermined. It is determined whether or not it matches the special game state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, by clearing the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to turn it off, the variable probability state and the time saving state may be ended and controlled to the normal state. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag may be maintained and the processing of step 042AKS013 may be ended. After performing end determination of such a probability variation state and a time saving state, special design stop processing is complete|finished. In addition, the end determination based on the special figure variation count value is performed only when it is a time saving state, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes "big hit" . Alternatively, for example, from a random counter provided in the RAM 102, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the end of the probability variable state is extracted, and by referring to the probability variable state end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101 etc., the probability variable state is terminated. You may make it determine whether to carry out.

FIG. 13-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S114 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot opening pre-processing. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 13-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start time flag is set to the ON state in response to the jackpot flag being ON in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in FIG. If the jackpot start flag is ON at step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game is waiting for the jackpot start effect (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in FIG. 3, when the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", the predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for the production at the start of the big hit is It is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapsing determination value (for example, "0", etc.), it is determined that the effect is waiting for the start of the big hit. , it may be determined that it is not in standby for the performance at the start of the big win in response to the coincidence.

If at step 042AKS022, it is waiting for the big hit start effect, step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating the game control process timer value by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), the big hit opening pre-processing is finished. On the other hand, when it is not waiting for the big win start effect at step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the big win start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024) and the big win opening opening number counter is cleared. Then (step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 is read (step 042AKS026), and the opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature part 042AK of the present embodiment, a common open control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type. An opening control pattern different from the type may be set. Also, even if the jackpot type is "probable variation" or "non-probability variation", for example, different opening control patterns are set depending on the jackpot type of "probability variation 1" and "probability variation 2", etc. Different opening control depending on the jackpot type May be set in a pattern.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the game is waiting until the opening of the big winning opening in the next round (waiting for next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether the game control process timer value matches the next open standby end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that it is waiting for the next open, while if it matches If so, it can be determined that it is not waiting for the next opening. If it is waiting for the next opening at step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), it proceeds to step 042AKS023 and updates the game control process timer value. In addition, the game control process timer value updated at step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the jackpot at step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined that the next opening is not in progress at step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; No), the large winning opening is opened according to the set opening control pattern and the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter. (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the processing of step 042AKS028, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the large winning opening opening time is set in the game control process timer, etc., and the special variable winning ball device 7 forms a large winning prize. A big winning opening opening time is set as the upper limit of the time during which the opening is kept open. In addition, for example, when a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined large winning opening door solenoid is started to be output via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening is turned on. state is set.

At this time, for example, when the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter is any of "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the large winning opening opening time is set to the game control process timer. is set to

Then, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a designation command during opening of the big winning opening to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the count value of the number of times the big winning opening is opened is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special figure process flag is set to the value corresponding to the big hit open process. After updating to 5″ (step 042AKS031), the big winning opening pre-opening process is terminated.

FIG. 13-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 6 as the process during jackpot opening. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 13-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening by determining whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on. (Step 042AKS041). At step 042AKS041, if there is no winning of the game ball into the big winning hole (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, at step 042AKS041, if there is a winning of the game ball into the big winning hole (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 adds 1 to the winning number count value and updates it, and the game ball enters the big winning hole. A setting is made to transmit a prize designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated winning prize number count value has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value does not reach the predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), after the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether or not 29.5 seconds have passed since the opening of the big winning opening, depending on whether or not the timer value is matched (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is terminated.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value has reached the predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if 29.5 seconds have passed since the large winning opening was opened in step 042AKS045 (Step 042AKS043; Yes), for example, by stopping the output of a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined solenoid for the door of the large winning opening through a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening is closed. (Step 042AKS046), and clear the winning number count value (Step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, the setting for transmitting the specified command after opening the large winning opening is made to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special figure process flag is changed after opening the large winning opening. After updating to "6" which is the value corresponding to the process (step 042AKS049), the process during big hit opening is ended.

In this way, special symbol stop processing shown in Figure 13-2, big hit opening pre-processing shown in Figure 13-3, big hit opening process shown in Figure 13-4, etc. (including jackpot opening post-processing, jackpot end processing, etc.) is executed, the transmission setting of various effect control commands such as a winning start designation command, a large winning mouth opening designation command, a winning designation command, and a large winning mouth opening designation command is performed. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 5 is executed, and the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12, so that the effect control board 12 side , timings such as the start of the big win, the opening (start of the round) and closing (end of the round) of the big win, the winning of the big win and the end of the big win.

FIG. 13-5 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing performed in the big hit effect processing in step S176 of FIG. 9 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 13-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command is received (step 042AKS051). When it is determined that the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened reaches the set upper limit number of executions in the jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 in FIG. It is a command transmitted from the side of 11, and is a command for ending the effect during the big hit and executing the ending effect.

If it is determined that the hit end designation command is not received (step 042AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the nR was started (elapsed of the nR predetermined period). Determine (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and its initial value is "1" and is incremented one by one in the process of step 042AKS066, which will be described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, which is set as a timer value at the start of the round game. When the timer value becomes "0", it may be determined that the predetermined period has passed since the nR-th round started. More specifically, from the side of the main board 11 in response to the fact that the large winning opening is completely open (detection that the large winning opening door has moved to the position where it is completely open) A designated command during the opening of the big winning opening is transmitted, and counting of a timer value for a predetermined period may be started from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the characterizing part 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the round game of the first round is started, the obtained number display indicating the number of obtained balls and the round indicating the number of rounds are displayed. display is performed. On the side of the performance control board 12, during the period from the big win to the end (the period from the fanfare to the ending), each time a winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the big winning opening is received, the winning number is obtained. is continuously added by 15. On the side of the effect control board 12, when the winning designation command is received, it is necessary to first analyze the command, add the winning number, and display the added winning number. It takes a predetermined period of time to display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processes will not be completed in time for the wins from the start of the first round game until the predetermined period elapses, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of wins. , the process of displaying "0015" may not keep up with the process of displaying "0015" despite winning ("0000" is displayed and then "0015" is displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the characterizing part 042AK of the present embodiment, 0.6 seconds is provided as a predetermined period, and when the game ball existing in the upper part of the big winning opening at the opening timing wins from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed In addition, a period is secured in which "0015" is directly displayed without "0000" being displayed as the display of the number of acquisitions. On the other hand, in the characterizing portion 042AK of the present embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval in the case of continuous firing. Taking this into consideration, the time interval required for the continuously shot game balls to enter the big winning opening is the shooting interval. Therefore, the number of winnings in the big winning opening is one after the opening of the big winning opening until the number of wins is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to an increase in the winning number display at the timing when the round number display is started due to an increase in the winning number in the state before the winning number display and the round number display are performed. can do. Although the predetermined period in the characterizing portion 042AK of the present embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

When it is determined that the predetermined period has not passed after starting the nR (step 042AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round. Determine (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is set to "1", and incremented by 1 in step 042AKS066, and "1" is reached in step 042AKS068. cleared to In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether or not n=1 by checking the value of n.

When it is determined that n=1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs a right-handed effect to suggest that the player should hit to the right, and suggests that a big hit game state has occurred. The operation control of the fanfare effect is performed (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, when it is determined that n≠1 (step 042AKS053; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n−1R and the number of acquisitions, and also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n−1R. (step 042AKS055). In the process of step 042AKS055, for example, when n=2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of wins are displayed, and the action control during the big hit corresponding to the first round is performed. In the process of step 042AKS055, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 as an effect during the big win, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the effect during the big win, and predetermined music and voice are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if an effect of outputting The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the big win effect may be set in advance.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command is received, that is, whether or not a game ball has won a prize in a large winning opening (step 042AKS056). In addition, in the processing of step 042AKS056, the prize winning is determined for a predetermined period from the start of the nR. When the winning designation command is not received (step 042AKS056; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the various display processes as it is.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the big winning opening within a predetermined period after the start of the nR (step 042AKS056; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of winning balls. is incremented by "15" (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of winning balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and "15" is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 to be described later. The number of acquired balls is continuously counted during the so-called continuous game, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time-saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the end timing of the continuous game. . After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the attacker lamp 9c and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). It should be noted that the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is, for example, a mode (winning The light is emitted in a manner that notifies that the Therefore, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game amusement can be improved. Regarding the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of times of light emission per unit time at the time of winning may be larger than that at the time of the jackpot effect. In addition, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period, in addition to lighting the attacker lamp 9c, a winning sound is output. Therefore, it is easy to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning slot, and the game amusement can be improved.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS058, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n=1, that is, whether or not it is the first round (first R), as in step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059 ). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), various display processes are terminated. On the other hand, if n≠1, i.e., if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of winning balls added at step 042AKS057 is displayed (display the number of winning), and the number of winning is displayed. After updating the display (step 042AKS060), various display processes are terminated. It should be noted that in the characterizing part 042AK of the present embodiment, when the acquired number update display is performed in the processing of step 042AKS060, instead of displaying the count value of the number of acquired balls that was added in step 042AKS057 as it is, As shown in 12(a-23), after performing a count-up display (notifying display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), the number of acquisitions is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the increase in the number of winning balls, and the interest in the game can be improved.

If it is determined that a predetermined period has passed since the start of the nR at step 042AKS052 in FIG. 13-5 (step 042AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nR and the number of acquisitions. , and, at the same time, the operation control of the effect during the nR-th big hit is performed (step 042AKS061). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round, the display of the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions is performed for the first time at step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the lapse of the predetermined period, the number of wins is updated and displayed at step 042AKS061. Specifically, when the game ball enters the big winning hole before the predetermined period elapses, the winning number is incremented by "15" at step 042AKS057. ) as shown in Figure 13-11 (a-21) after performing the count-up display (notifying display that the number of winnings is increasing), the number of winnings in this big win has not increased. Display the number of wins (display of "0015") that is different from the predetermined display indicating (as a specific display) (You can do this after uploading.) On the other hand, if the game ball has not entered the big winning hole before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the winning number remains "0" and the winning number has not increased in this big hit. -22), as a predetermined display, display of the number of winnings (display of "0000") indicating that the number of winnings has not increased (in the case of consecutive games, the number of winnings at the time of the previous big win is displayed); display). In addition to "0000", the number of acquisitions (predetermined display) indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased may be a display other than a number, such as "----" or "not increased". You may do so. In step 042AKS061, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 as an effect during the big win, and the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the effect during the big win, and predetermined music and voice are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if an effect of outputting The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the big win effect may be set in advance. In this way, during a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened, that is, in a situation where the winning number is not displayed, the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the big winning hole. However, in a situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately displayed. , and the production effect lamp 9 emits more light than during the predetermined period. Therefore, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease. The production can be livened up and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, since the performance effect lamp 9 is lighted at the same timing as the execution timing of the performance during the big win, the performance can be livened up at once at the timing when the performance during the big win is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS061, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command is received, that is, whether or not a game ball has won a prize in a large winning opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of winning balls (step 042AKS063), The attacking card 9c is illuminated, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output, a count-up display (notifying display that the winning number increases) is performed, and then the winning number update display is performed to display the winning number. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS064, or when the winning designation command is not received at step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the n+1R which is the next round of the nR has started. It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be determined by whether or not a special winning opening open designation command indicating the start of the (n+1)th R is received from the main board 11 side. When the n+1R has not started, that is, when the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is not received and the nR remains (step 042AKS065; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is. . On the other hand, when the n+1R starts, that is, when the large winning opening open specification command indicating the start of the n+1R is received (step 042AKS065; Yes), n is incremented by "1" (step 042AKS066) and then various display processes exit. For example, if n=1, that is, in the first round, then n=2 at step 042AKS066. Although n=2 and this is the second round, it is determined as No in steps 042AKS052 and 053 until the predetermined period has elapsed, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round which is n-1R. A round display is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nRth round, is performed (displayed in the processing of step 042AKS061 after determination of Yes in step 042AKS052).

If it is determined at step 042AKS051 that the hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the end of the big hit effect corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending effect (step 042AKS067), clears n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and terminates various display processes.

Next, display timings for displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of wins, etc., and examples of effect operations will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 13-6 to 13-14. Note that the illustrated example shows a case of a so-called initial win (first big win) instead of a consecutive game.

FIG. 13-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning slot, the timing of various displays, and the like. FIGS. 13-7 to 13-14 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation display, the open/closed state of the big winning opening, and the lighting state of various lamps on the image display device 5. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 13-6 and 13-7(a-1), when a combination of decorative symbols constituting a big win is stopped and displayed, a big win game state is entered. At this stage, as shown in FIG. 13-7(b-1), the big winning opening is closed. In addition, in order to inform the player of the big hit, as shown in FIG. Various production effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, the lower lamp 9f of the display device, and the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 and the lower stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 .

When the jackpot hits, as shown in FIG. 13-6, during the period until the predetermined period of the first round ends, a right-handed hitting effect and a fanfare effect are performed to inform the player that the player should hit right-handed (see FIG. 13-6). 5 step 042AKS054). The period from the big win to the start of the 1st R shown in FIG. 13-6 is a period sufficiently longer than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 13-7(a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, and together with this, as shown in FIG. 13-7(c-2), All the production effect lamps 9 are turned off once. Then, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center portion, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and a right-handed performance is performed by displaying "Right-handed" in a large size on the image display device. It should be noted that the small right-handed display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 13-7(a-2) may be displayed continuously during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed effect, as shown in FIGS. Display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the effect lamps 9 will be described below. When the right hitting effect is started, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (c-3), the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g provided in the lower left of the game area is first lit, followed by FIG. 13-7 ( As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the lower left frame lamp 9, lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (c-5), of the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left display device lower lamp 9fL lights up, and then As shown in FIG. 13-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left part, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 13-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L part 9eL lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the upper left side. As shown in FIG. 13-8(b-7), since the big winning hole is in a closed state, the launched game medium does not enter the big winning hole at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 13-8 (b-7) shows an example in which the launched game ball passes through the second path in the upper part of the big winning opening door and is guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided in the central upper portion of the game board 2 lights up, and FIG. 13-8 (c-9 ), when the main lamp 9 above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 lights up, the effect lamp 9 provided in the upper central portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 lights up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R portion lights up, and then as shown in FIG. 13-8 (c-11), the frame lamp in the upper right portion 9 lights up, and as shown in FIG. The lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right part, lights up, and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. do. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the lower right side. As a result, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center portion, and then the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1, so that the player hits right on the performance effect lamps 9. A right-handed production that suggests will be performed. In this example, both the effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are used to suggest a right-hand shot. may be In addition, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 is lit from the lower left side to the center and to the lower right direction, and only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 is lit from the lower left side to the center and right. Both of them may be lit simultaneously or with a time lag, such as lighting in the downward direction.

After the right-handed effect on the effect lamps 9 is completed, all the effect lamps 9 are extinguished as shown in FIG. 13-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 13-9(a-15), the display of hitting to the right on the image display device 5 continues (the effect of hitting to the right is being executed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-6, when it is time to open the big winning hole, the 1st R is started, and the big winning hole is opened as shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-16). At this stage, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (a-16), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed, and until a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (c-16) 13-10 (a-19) and (c-19). Even if all the effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any one of the indices such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set lower than usual. In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-16), even after the big winning opening is opened, until a predetermined period of time elapses, FIGS. As shown in (c-13), the production effect lamps 9 may be turned on sequentially to suggest a right-hand shot. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be made faster than before the opening of the big prize opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be made faster). In addition, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big winning hole is opened to suggest hitting to the right, after the attacker lamp 9c which is lit last is lit, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (c-15). It is also possible to keep the lighting state as it is without turning off the light. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the big winning opening is in the open state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-17), when the big winning opening is completely opened, a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period corresponding to the first R, and FIG. 13-10 As shown in (b-18), when the game ball enters the big winning hole, the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side. Before the 1st R is started (before the big winning hole is opened), the game ball launched by performing the right-handed effect (game ball hit early) also has the big winning hole open. If it exists in the upper part of the big winning slot at the timing, it is possible to win within a predetermined period corresponding to the 1st round. On the side of the effect control board 12, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-18) by the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 2, the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that a prize has been won. In addition, as described above, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c is performed in a manner that is more than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c, which emits light during the jackpot middle effect, for example. In the example shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning path provided with the count switch 23. example. In addition, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present at the big winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing above the big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period of time after the opening of the big winning hole, and the decrease in the interest in the game can be prevented without making the player feel uneasy. can be prevented.

As shown in Figure 13-10 (b-18), after the game ball has entered the big winning opening, or after the time has passed without winning from the state shown in Figure 13-10 (b-17), Figure 13- 10 (a-19), (b-19) and (c-19) after a predetermined period of time, as shown in FIG. Since the execution timing has come and the execution timing for displaying the number of acquisitions has come, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 13-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-18), when the game ball enters the big winning opening before the predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (a-20), the second The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and a count-up display is also performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as an effect during the big hit (effect during the 1st R), as shown in FIG. , and characters are displayed. In addition, the decorative patterns that make up the big hit displayed as the production during the jackpot (production during the 1st R) and the display of “during BOUNUS” are not shown (the same applies to FIGS. 13 to 20 described later). It is displayed in a manner suggesting that the ball should be hit to the right as shown at 13-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (A-1), a fanfare or right-handed effect is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the big winning opening is opened, the effect during the big win is shown in FIG. 13-21. As shown in (A-2), a symbol "7", which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a big win, is displayed facing the front, and is displayed above "B" in the display of "BOUNUS". A star image is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (A-3), the symbol "7", which is the decorative symbol that constitutes the big win, is tilted in the right-back direction, and the display of "BOUNUS" shows " A star-shaped image shifts to the top of "O". Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (A-4), the symbol “7”, which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a big win, faces the front, and a star is placed above “N” in the “BOUNUS” display. The shape image shifts. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (A-5), the symbol "7", which is the decorative symbol that constitutes the big win, is tilted toward the back left. , a star-shaped image shifts to the top of . Then, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (A-6), the symbol "7", which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a big win, faces the front, and a star is placed above "S" in the display of "BOUNUS". The shape image transitions back to FIG. 13-21 (A-2). In this way, during the big win effect, the decoration patterns that constitute the big win are moved in the right back direction, the front direction, and the left back direction, and a star-shaped image is displayed rightward from the characters on the left of the display of "BOUNUS in progress". This suggests to the player that he should hit to the right by shifting the . The action display of decorative patterns and the transitional display of the star-shaped image, which constitute the jackpot, are referred to as effect display. It includes indications such as turning to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner suggesting right-handed hitting. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should hit the ball to the right, making it easier to recognize the hitting to the right.

Incidentally, during the big-hit production, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (c-20), the production effect lamp 9 is lit according to a light emission pattern preset according to the big-hit production. In this example, a light emission pattern is set in which the effect lamps 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 and the effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the number of acquisitions. In this way, the effect lamp 9 does not emit light as shown in FIGS. As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is lit after the display of the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to suppress the rapid shooting and promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined period has passed without the game ball entering the big winning slot, as shown in FIG. is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and the decoration pattern that constitutes the big hit is displayed as a production during the big hit (production during the 1st R), the display of "During BOUNUS", and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the light emission pattern preset according to the effect during the big win are common regardless of whether the player wins or not.

Next, as time passes, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (b-23), when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening in the 1st R, the upper limit that can open the big winning opening period. In addition, along with the winning, the processing of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 13-5 is executed, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 13-12 (a-23), and FIG. 13-12 (a-24). As shown in , the acquisition number display of "0150" is performed. In addition, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner notifying that a prize has been won. In addition, the upper limit period for which the big winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted after the predetermined period has elapsed for winning 10 game balls. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the predetermined period has elapsed. Since the interval between consecutive shots is 0.6 seconds, it is a period in which 10 prizes can be won. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because a sufficient amount of time is guaranteed for winning a prize.

When the 10th game ball wins the big prize hole in the 1st R, the maximum period in which the big prize hole can be opened is reached, so the big prize hole is opened as shown in FIG. controlled to be closed. After that, until the second R shown in FIG. 13-6 is started, the big winning opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 13-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the 2nd R elapses (until the predetermined period elapses after n=2), the number of rounds corresponding to the 1st R is displayed as shown in FIG. , the effect during the big win is continuously performed (the display of the winning number is updated according to the winning), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the effect during the big win as shown in FIG. 13-12 (c-25). to light up.

In the 1st R, when the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball There is a case where a so-called over-winning occurs in which the ball enters the big winning hole following the tenth game ball. Even in the case of over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. In this case, after the count-up display and win count display corresponding to the 10th win, the count-up display and win count display corresponding to the over win are performed continuously, but FIG. 13-12 (b-25). As shown in , the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over winning are completed within a period from when the big winning port is completely closed to before it becomes an open state corresponding to the second R. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that an over-win has occurred in the 1st round, and the game interest can be improved. In addition, since the update of the display of the number of acquisitions in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the display of the number of acquisitions in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is possible to determine whether the winning corresponds to the opening of the round. easier. Also, the winning sound corresponding to the over winning may be a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, when the count value exceeds the upper limit of "10", the over-winning sound may be output. Also, the attacker lamp 9c may emit light in a mode corresponding to an over-win, which is different from light emission in a normal winning mode.

Then, corresponding to the second round, as shown in FIG. 13-6, the timing comes when the big winning opening is opened again, and as shown in FIG. 13-13 (b-26), the big winning opening is opened again. controlled to be At this time, it is judged as Yes in step 042AKS065 of FIG. Become. At this stage, since the process of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 13-5 is executed, as shown in FIGS. A display is made (see also FIG. 13-6).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (b-27), when the big winning hole is completely opened and the game ball enters the big winning hole, unlike the first R, the step of FIG. 13-5 In the processing of 042AKS060, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 13-13 (a-27), and the acquisition number display of "0165" is performed as shown in FIG. 13-13 (a-28). In addition, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up. In this way, in rounds other than the 1st round, even if the prize is won during a predetermined period, the winning number is updated and displayed during the predetermined period. Then, when the 2R predetermined period elapses, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 13-5 is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. ' is displayed, and a big win middle effect corresponding to the 2nd R is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Further, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the second R predetermined period elapses. In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, an example is shown in which a common jackpot production is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to lighting control of the production effect lamp 9), but it is executed in each round. The performance during the jackpot to be played may be varied. The lighting of the production effect lamp 9 is the same. In this way, since the big winning hole is opened before the number of rounds indicating that it is the second round is displayed, the game balls of the player who has been continuously shot from the first round can be released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize mouth. Therefore, in each round of a plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility that the continuously shot game balls will win the big winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the opening of the big winning opening is controlled corresponding to the second R, and FIG. 13-13 (a-29) ), (b-29), and (c-29), when a predetermined period of time elapses without the game ball winning after the big winning hole is completely opened, FIG. 13-14 (a-31) ), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of wins acquired in the 1st R is displayed continuously. After that, similar processing is performed up to the predetermined final round, and when it is determined that the winning end designation command is received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. Set to terminate. In this way, from the second round onwards, if no prize is won within the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, while if the prize is won during the predetermined period , the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round is added to the displayed number of acquired balls. Therefore, even after the second round, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning slot.

In addition, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning hole and reaches the upper limit period, the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball As shown in FIGS. 13-15, the big win game state may end while the ball is caught in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, when the next big hit occurs, at the start of the 1st round (when the big winning slot corresponding to the 1st round is opened), the game ball will enter the big winning slot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st round Winning of game balls occurs. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. As shown in (a-21), "0015" may be displayed as the display of the acquired number after performing the count-up display. Also, in such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will win a prize during the predetermined period (possibility that the second ball will win a prize). As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after the count-up display is performed, "0030" may be directly displayed as the acquired number display without displaying "0000" or "0015". According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the game interest.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the winning number in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 13-5 after a predetermined period of time after the first round is started with the big winning opening opened. Then, if the game ball does not enter the big winning slot within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, a predetermined display indicating that the winning number has not increased is performed after the predetermined period. When a game ball wins a prize in a big winning hole within a predetermined period after the start of one round, the obtained number is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the game ball wins the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, directly specifies without displaying the winning number of "0000" as a predetermined display. Display the acquisition number display of "0015" as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a count-up display as a notification display that the number of winnings increases when the game ball wins the big prize hole within a predetermined period after the start of the first round. , display the acquired number display of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of wins increases.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command for specifying during the opening of the large winning opening transmitted from the main board 11 in response to the opening of the large winning opening. is started, and the acquired number is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, the predetermined period is preferably counted, and when the prize is won within the predetermined period, the specific display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1, by closing the large winning opening door, guides the launched game ball through the second route of the upper part of the large winning opening door to the discharge route, By opening the winning opening door, the shot game ball is led to the big winning opening through the first path and detected by the count switch 23. - 特許庁The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present at the big winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. . According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game balls existing above the big winning hole are detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the big winning hole, and the game is interesting without giving the player a sense of unease. can be prevented from decreasing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-6, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The effect is displayed to the player to indicate that he/she should hit to the right. According to this, since the game area to be shot during the big win is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

The open state of the big winning gate means that the big winning gate is in a completely open state, that is, the state where the big winning gate has moved to a position where it is in a completely open state. In response to detecting that the game has moved to a completely open position, the main board 11 side transmits a designation command while the big winning opening is open. According to this, since the predetermined period is counted after the big winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

In addition, the game ball (fast-hit game ball) launched by performing the right-handed effect before the 1st R starts (before the big winning hole is opened) also has the big winning hole open. If it exists above the big winning opening at the timing, it is possible to win within a predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R, and the effect control CPU 120, when winning within the predetermined period, after the predetermined period, the specified Acquisition number display as display is performed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game balls hit quickly from being wasted.

Also, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball As shown in FIGS. 13-15, the big win game state may end while the ball is caught in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, when the next big hit occurs, at the start of the 1st round (when the big winning slot corresponding to the 1st round is opened), the game ball will enter the big winning slot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st round A game ball wins, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning number as a specific display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a fanfare effect suggesting that the jackpot game state has been reached while the big winning hole is in the closed state to the open state. After the big winning opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, the winning number is displayed and the number of rounds is displayed, and an effect during a big win corresponding to the round game can be executed. According to this, it is possible to sharpen the presentation and improve the amusement of the game.

Further, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The attacker lamp 9c is turned on as shown in FIG. 13-10 (c-18). Also, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (b-23), even if the game ball wins in the big winning hole other than the predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (c-23), the attacker lamp Light 9c. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease, and the fact that the prize has been won within the predetermined period can be visually recognized. easier.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. Light is emitted in a mode (a mode for notifying that a prize has been won) that is more than the number of times of light emission per time. According to this, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole during a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened, A winning sound corresponding to winning is output. Also, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins in the big winning hole outside the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. According to this, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, for the rounds after the first round, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the round in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. conduct. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning the game balls continuously shot to the big winning hole opened earlier than the round display.

In addition, when the round game after the second round is performed, the effect control CPU 120, if the game medium does not enter the big winning opening within a predetermined period after the opening of the big winning opening, As shown in 13-14 (a-31), when the display of the winning number displayed in the previous round game is continued to be displayed, and at the same time, the game medium wins the big prize slot within the predetermined period. , as shown in FIG. 13-14 (a-30), displays the number of winning balls awarded corresponding to the win from the winning number display displayed in the previous round game. According to this, even after the second round, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs count-up display as shown in FIG. In this case, after the count-up display and win count display corresponding to the 10th win, the count-up display and win count display corresponding to the over win are performed continuously, but FIG. 13-12 (b-25). As shown in , the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within a period from when the big winning port is completely closed until it becomes an open state corresponding to the second R. According to this, the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the time of the next opening, so that it is easy to determine which opening corresponds to the win.

Further, the effect control CPU 120, during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the winning number display is not performed, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (c-18), the game Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball wins the big prize hole, in a situation where the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed, for example, FIG. 13-11 (c-20) or ( As shown in c-21), the production effect lamp 9 provided in the multiple game machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided in the game board 2 are alternately turned on, and more than during the predetermined period. The production effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the subsequent production and improve the amusement of the game.

13-6, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect before the start of the first round. 13-7 (c-3) to 13-9 (c-13), the production effect lamp 9 may be sequentially lit to suggest right-handed hitting, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed Regarding, for example, as shown in FIGS. The lamps 9 are lit alternately. According to this, the production effect lamp 9 can be used to suggest a right-hand shot. In addition, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big winning hole is opened to suggest hitting to the right, after the attacker lamp 9c which is lit last is lit, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (c-15). It is also possible to keep the lighting state as it is without extinguishing the light, thereby making the player aware that the big winning hole is in the open state.

Also, the upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened is a period sufficient for ten game balls to win even if counted after the predetermined period has passed. According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because a sufficient amount of time is guaranteed for winning a prize.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period has elapsed, that is, until the winning number is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 13-9 (c-16) to (c-19) 13-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is lighted after the display of the number of acquisitions after the elapse of the predetermined period is displayed. Let According to this, it is possible to encourage the player to suppress the rapid shooting and promote the launch timing.

13-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production control CPU 120 emits the production effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution timing of the production during the jackpot after the elapse of the predetermined period. Let According to this, the performance can be livened up at once at the timing when the performance during the big win is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-21, the effect control CPU 120, at the timing when the number of wins is displayed, displays an effect display that shifts and displays decorative patterns and star-shaped images that constitute a big win, suggesting hitting to the right. mode. According to this, the effect display suggests that the ball should be hit to the right, and the player can easily recognize that the ball should be hit to the right.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the production effect lamps 9 turn on in order to suggest that the player should hit to the right. Although the example of turning off all the effect lamps 9 after the right-handed effect by the effect lamps 9 is completed, this is just an example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 13-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), FIGS. 13-16 (a-16A), (b-16A), and (c-16A) 13-16 (c-16A) at the timing (FIG. 13-16 (b-16A)) where the big winning hole is opened, the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 An attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be lit. According to this, it is possible for the player to easily visually recognize that the big winning opening is in the open state. The attacker lamp 9c may be lit continuously until a predetermined period elapses or during the open period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the round display is updated from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". , "R" is continuously displayed from the first round, and the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R elapses, but this is just an example. be. For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17, at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the big winning opening is closed, the display of "1" out of the display of "1R" is erased. , "R" may be displayed only. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the second R predetermined period has elapsed, and "2R" indicating the second round may be displayed. It should be noted that the same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, the end of each round can be visually recognized, and the game can be sharpened.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the maximum number of prizes to be won is 10 (maximum number of prizes to be won is 10), which is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened. , it may be arranged that if two coins are received during a predetermined period before the number of rounds is displayed, an over-win is awarded. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound) may be output as the winning sound for the over winning during the predetermined period, and the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of the over winning. .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example of counting the number of game balls entering the big winning hole is shown for the display of the winning number. good too. Since the right-handed ball is hit during the big hit, the general winning hole for winning the prize is the general winning hole 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIGS. 13 to 18 are flow charts showing an example of various display processes in the case of counting winnings to the general winning opening 10 during the big win. Note that the description of the same parts as in FIG. 13-5 is omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIGS. 13-18, when it is determined that the winning designation command has not been received at step 042AKS056 (step 042AKS056; No), a general winning showing that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 10 It is determined whether or not the designated command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the general winning slot 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of winning balls ( step 042AKS082). After executing the processing of step 042AKS082, or when the general winning designation command is not received, that is, when there is no winning to the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the processing of step 042AKS059 is performed. In addition, along with the winning of the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the case of winning the big winning hole) may be output.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIGS. 13-18, when it is determined that the winning designation command has not been received at step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), it further indicates that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether or not a general winning designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the general winning slot 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of winning balls ( Step 042AKS083), update display of the acquired number (step 042AKS085). When performing the acquisition number update display in step 042 AKS085, the acquisition number display is performed after performing the display of counting up (notifying display that the acquisition number is increasing). After executing the process of step 042AKS085, or when the general winning designation command is not received, that is, when there is no winning to the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS065. In addition, along with the winning of the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the case of winning the big winning hole) may be output.

Next, an example of an effect operation and the like in the case of counting winnings to the general winning opening 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-19 and 13-20. 13-19 and 13-20 are diagrams showing an example of effect operation display, the open/closed state of the big winning opening, and the lighting state of various lamps on the image display device 5. FIG. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Figure 13-19 are shown in Figure 13-10 ( a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the big winning opening is opened, a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period. When the game ball enters the general winning hole 10, the state shifts to that shown in FIGS. 13-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). 13-19 (b-18A), after the game ball has entered the general winning opening 10, or from the state shown in FIG. When the time passes without winning the winning hole 10 and a predetermined period of time elapses as shown in FIGS. When winning the mouth 10, it shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 13-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), (c-20A), and as shown in FIG. , the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is displayed, and a count-up display is performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as a production during the big hit (production during the 1st R), as shown in FIG. , and characters are displayed. During the big-hit production, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (c-20A), the production effect lamp 9 is lit according to a light emission pattern preset according to the big-hit production. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the acquired number display.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has passed without the game ball winning the general winning slot 10, as shown in FIG. ” is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and the decoration pattern that constitutes the big hit is displayed as a production during the big hit (production during the 1st R), the display of "During BOUNUS", and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the light emission pattern preset according to the effect during the big win are common regardless of whether the player wins or not.

Thus, even if the game ball wins the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined After the period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the number of wins in response to the winning in the general winning slot 10. FIG. Further, when no game ball wins in the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded. Therefore, since the winning number corresponding to the winning is also displayed for the game balls that have won the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 042AK is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and display means (for example, the image display device 5). Directing effect control CPU 120 etc.) and variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 etc.) that can be changed between a first state in which game media are easy to win and a second state in which game media are impossible or difficult to win. and control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state while being controlled to the advantageous state. (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value given to the variable prize winning means by winning a game medium ( For example, displaying the number of wins, etc.), when the first round game out of a plurality of round games is performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state After the lapse of time, the awarded amount is displayed (for example, in the first round, the winning number is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and within the predetermined period of time, the game medium is displayed by the variable winning means. If no prize is won, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the display of the number of winnings), and If the game medium wins in the variable prize winning means within a predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the given amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display). etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display when the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period. (For example, "0015" may be displayed instead of "0000").

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the display means provides the game value when a game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period. After performing a count-up display indicating , a display corresponding to the game value given as the specific display is performed (for example, after performing a count-up display as a notification display that the number of acquisitions increases, "0015" , etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that there is a prize and the number of wins will increase.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means displays a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state. After the predetermined period of time has passed after the reception, the display of the amount to be awarded is started (for example, counting of the timer value for the predetermined period is started from the timing of receiving the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening transmitted from the main board 11 side. etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is preferably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the variable prize winning means is in the first state to lead the game medium to a prize winning path through a first path (for example, a large prize winning path). By opening the winning opening door, the fired game ball is led to the first path and leading to the big winning opening, etc.), and the second state is established to lead the game medium to the discharge path. Path forming means including 2 paths (for example, by closing the big winning gate door, the launched game ball is guided to the ejection path by passing through the second path in the upper part of the big winning gate door) and detection means (e.g., count switch 23, etc.) formed in the winning path for detecting the winning of the game medium, wherein the time from the path forming means to the detection means for the game medium is within the predetermined period. (For example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door is detected by the count switch 23 is a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds or less. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing above the big winning hole is detected within a predetermined period of time after the opening of the big winning hole, so that the game can be enjoyed without making the player feel uneasy. A decrease can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means is in the first state, Performing an operation prompting display that promotes the operation (for example, during the period from the big win to the opening of the big winning opening, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (a-3), the game to indicate to the player that they should hit right).

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized, and the game interest can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the first state is a state in which a variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example, The open state of the big winning gate means that the big winning gate is in a completely open state, that is, the state where the big winning gate has moved to a position where it is in a completely open state. In response to detecting that the game has moved to a completely open position, the main board 11 side may transmit a designation command during the opening of the big winning opening.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the big winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above, the operation prompting display is performed before the first round game in the advantageous state is started. When the shot game medium wins in the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the game ball shot by performing a right-handed effect before the first round is started). However, it is possible to win a prize at the timing when the big prize opening is opened, and if a prize is won within the predetermined period, the number of wins may be displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game media shot before the start of the round game from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above, in the final round game among the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, the variable winning means When changing from the first state to the second state, the advantageous state ends with the game medium sandwiched (for example, in the final round, the 11th game ball is a special variable winning ball as shown in FIGS. 13-15 Device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a), the jackpot game state ends while being sandwiched, etc.), the first round game when controlled again to the advantageous state in the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state, and when the sandwiched game medium wins in the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed ( For example, when the next big hit occurs, the game ball enters the big winning slot at the start of the 1st round, and after the lapse of a predetermined period, the winning number is displayed as a specific display.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the period until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state after being controlled to the advantageous state , it is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state (for example, during the period from the closed state to the open state of the big winning port, a fanfare effect suggesting that a big win game state has been executed) possible, etc.), along with the start of display of the given amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period, it is possible to execute a round game display capable of specifying the round game being executed and an effect during the round corresponding to the round game. (For example, after a predetermined period of time has passed after the big winning opening is opened, the number of wins is displayed together with the number of rounds, and it is possible to execute an effect during the big win corresponding to the round game).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to sharpen the presentation and improve the game interest.

(Explanation of means related to characteristic part 043AK)
Characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 043AK. (1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 043AK is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and the display means (for example, the image display device 5) Directing effect control CPU 120 etc.) and variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 etc.) that can be changed between a first state in which game media are easy to win and a second state in which game media are impossible or difficult to win. and,
Control means (for example, CPU 103 for performing a round game, etc.), and the display means can display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given by winning the game medium to the variable prize winning means (for example, a winning number display, etc.), when the first round game among the round games is performed, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state The awarded amount is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period of time. If not, after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded (for example, "0000" is displayed as the display of the number of winnings), and the predetermined period of time is reached. If the game medium wins in the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded after the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the display of the number of winnings). , a light emitting means (for example, the production effect lamp 9, etc.), and a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emitting means, the light emission control means, after the elapse of the predetermined period, the game medium When the variable winning means is won, and when the game medium wins the variable winning means before the predetermined period elapses, the light emitting means is controlled with a light emission pattern corresponding to the winning of the game medium ( For example, when a game ball wins in a big winning hole, the attacker lamp 9c is illuminated regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, when a prize is won within the predetermined period, the specific display is performed, so that it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease, and also to prevent the player from losing interest in the game, even if the prize is won within the predetermined period. becomes easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the light emitting means may be a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) positioned near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins in the variable winning means. etc.), and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, the performance effect lamp 9 other than the attack lamp 9c). , The number of times of light emission per unit time is larger than the light emission of the predetermined light emission means (for example, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064), and the game other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light in the production during the jackpot The number of times of light emission of the effect lamp 9 per unit time is greater than the number of light emission (a form for notifying that the player has won a prize).

According to this configuration, it is easy to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

(3) The gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above further includes sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the sound output means is activated when a game medium wins in the variable winning means. A winning sound corresponding to winning is output, and when the game medium wins in the variable winning means after the lapse of the predetermined period and when the game medium wins in the variable winning means before the lapse of the predetermined period, the winning A sound may be output (for example, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, a winning sound may be output regardless of whether the winning is within a predetermined period).

According to this configuration, it is easy to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 044AK)
Characteristic portion 042AK includes the following characteristic portion 044AK. (1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 044AK is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player, and display means (for example, the image display device 5). Directing effect control CPU 120 etc.) and variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 etc.) that can be changed between a first state in which game media are easy to win and a second state in which game media are impossible or difficult to win. and control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state while being controlled to the advantageous state. (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value given to the variable prize winning means by winning a game medium ( For example, the number of acquisitions is displayed), a round game display that can identify the round game being executed can be displayed (for example, the number of rounds is displayed), and the first round of the multiple round games When a game is played, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state, the awarded amount display and the round game display corresponding to the first round game are performed. is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the second and subsequent rounds of the multiple round games are displayed. When a game is played, the round game display corresponding to the second round game or later is displayed after the predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the second round, the number of rounds is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened.) If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, After the lapse of time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the display of the amount to be given (for example, "0000" is displayed as the display of the number of acquisitions), and the game medium is changed within the predetermined period. When the winning means wins, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the given amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

According to this configuration, when a prize is won within a predetermined period, the specific display is performed, so that it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease. , it is possible to increase the possibility of winning the continuously shot game balls in the big winning hole opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the round game is played for the second time or later. If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the above period, the award amount display that was displayed in the previous round game is continued to be displayed (for example, when the round game after the second round is performed, If the game medium does not enter the big winning slot within a predetermined period after the big winning slot is opened, as shown in FIG. within a predetermined period after the variable prize-winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the round game is performed for the second time or later. When the game medium wins the variable winning means on the first day, the given amount corresponding to the game value given corresponding to the winning is added from the given amount display displayed in the previous round game. (For example, if the game medium wins the big prize slot within a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (a-30), the winning number display displayed in the previous round game , the number of winning balls awarded corresponding to the winning is added and displayed).

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the display means can update and display the display of the award amount being displayed in response to winning of game media in the variable winning means. The update display of the awarded amount display is finished until the variable winning means once changes from the first state to the second state and then returns to the first state (for example, the big winning opening is completely closed). The count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning may be completed within a period from the closing to the opening state corresponding to the 2nd R).

According to this configuration, the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the time of the next opening, so it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the win. .

(Description of means related to characteristic part 045AK)
Characteristic portion 042AK includes the following characteristic portion 045AK. (1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 045AK is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and display means (for example, the image display device 5). Directing effect control CPU 120 etc.) and variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 etc.) that can be changed between a first state in which game media are easy to win and a second state in which game media are impossible or difficult to win. and control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state while being controlled to the advantageous state. (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value given to the variable prize winning means by winning a game medium ( For example, displaying the number of wins, etc.), when the first round game out of a plurality of round games is performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state After the lapse of time, the awarded amount is displayed (for example, in the first round, the winning number is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and within the predetermined period of time, the game medium is displayed by the variable winning means. If no prize is won, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the display of the number of winnings), and When the game medium wins in the variable winning means within a predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the given amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display). etc.), a plurality of light emitting means (for example, effect lamp 9, etc.), and a light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emitting means, wherein the light emission control means is the variable winning means is in the first state and the display of the award amount after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the variable winning means is in the first state and the display of the award amount before the lapse of the predetermined period is better is not displayed (for example, during a predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (c-18) Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball wins the big prize hole, in a situation where the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed, for example, FIG. 13-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the production effect lamp 9 provided in the multiple game machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided in the game board 2 are alternately turned on, and the operation is performed more than during the predetermined period. , etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease, and display the number of winnings after the predetermined period of time. It is possible to liven up the production after the is performed and improve the amusement of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation prompting display for prompting the player to perform an operation is displayed. It is possible (for example, to perform a right-handed display, etc.), and the light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c etc.) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins in the variable winning means ), and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, the performance effect lamp 9 other than the attack lamp 9c), and when the variable winning means is in the first state, the When the application amount display is not displayed, the predetermined light emission means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the operation prompting display while the specific light emission means is caused to emit light, and the application amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period is displayed. When there is, the specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, until a predetermined period elapses after the large winning opening is opened, see FIG. 13-7 (c-3 ) to FIG. 13-9 (c-13), the production effect lamp 9 is sequentially lit to suggest right-handed hitting, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, for example, FIGS. -21), the production effect lamp 9 provided in the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the production effect lamp 9 provided in the game board 2 are alternately turned on, and the big winning opening is opened. In the case where the production effect lamps 9 are subsequently turned on sequentially to suggest a right-hand shot, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is turned on, as shown in FIG. etc.).

According to this configuration, the operation can be promoted by using the predetermined light emitting means, and the player can be made aware that the variable prize winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, in the round game, when a specific number of game media wins, one round game ends and the next round game starts. (For example, when 10 game balls win, it becomes an upper limit period in which a large winning opening can be opened.) After the predetermined period has passed, the time until the variable winning means is in the second state is It is sufficient time for the game medium to win the specified number of prizes (for example, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened, it is sufficient to count after the predetermined period has passed for 10 game balls to win). period, etc.).

According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because a sufficient amount of time is guaranteed for winning.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, in the round game, one round game ends when a specific number of game media wins, and the next round game starts (for example, 10 (e.g., the upper limit period for opening the big winning hole by winning a game ball), the time from the elapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means is in the second state is the game medium It is sufficient time for a specific number of prizes to be won (for example, the upper limit period for opening the large winning opening is sufficient even if counting from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win) etc.), when the variable prize winning means is in the first state, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted when the display of the award amount before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed, and the award after the predetermined period has elapsed After the amount display is displayed, the light emitting means is caused to emit light (for example, until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period elapses, that is, until the number of wins is displayed). As shown in c-19), the production effect lamp 9 is not illuminated, and as shown in FIGS. (e.g., the effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light).

According to this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to suppress the rapid shooting and promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above, the advantageous state is controlled until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, a fanfare effect can be executed), and the round game being executed can be specified along with the start of display of the given amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is possible to execute a round production corresponding to the display and the round game (for example, display the number of rounds, display the number of acquisitions, and perform a jackpot production after a predetermined period of time), and the execution timing of the production during the round is the same. Lighting the light emitting means at the timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is lighted at the same timing as the execution timing of the production during the big hit, etc.) , may be

According to this configuration, at the timing when the mid-round production is executed, the production can be livened up at once, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, further comprising general winning means (for example, general winning port 10) capable of winning game media, wherein the display means It is possible to display the awarded amount of game value imparted by winning the game medium to the general winning means as the imparted amount display (for example, display of the number of winnings corresponding to the winning to the general winning port 10 is displayed). etc.), if the game medium does not win the general winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period ( For example, if no game ball wins in the general prize winning opening 10 within a predetermined period, a predetermined display indicating that no prize balls have been awarded, such as "0000", is displayed, etc.). When the general prize winning means is won, after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a display corresponding to the winning of the general prize means is displayed as the amount display (for example, during a predetermined period after the big prize opening is opened) When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 10, after the predetermined period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the winning number display in response to the winning in the general winning opening 10). good too.

According to this configuration, since the display corresponding to the winning of the general winning means is also performed for the winning of the general winning means during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above, the variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the game area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the right game area). provided, etc.), the display means can display a first image (for example, a decorative pattern that constitutes a big win) at the same timing as the display of the award amount, and the first image is displayed during the advantageous state An effect is displayed at the same timing as the grant amount display (for example, an effect display that activates a decorative pattern that constitutes a big win is performed), and the effect display is displayed in a manner that suggests the predetermined area (for example, effect display , the decorative patterns that constitute the big hit are moved in the right back direction, the front, and the left back direction, and displayed in a manner suggesting a right hit).

According to this configuration, the game area to be shot is suggested by the effect display, and the player can easily recognize the game area to be shot.

(Description of the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH, the winning number display regarding the number of prize balls given in the big win game state and the notification that the number of prize balls given in the big win game state has reached a predetermined number. Acquisition number notification display and display are possible. The characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions and the display of the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific character used to display the number of wins is such that the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. As for the specific characters used for the display of the number of winnings, the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Background Art Related to First Form of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
FIG. 14-1 is a diagram showing a background art related to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the jackpot game state, it may display the winning number display regarding the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 14-1(A). In the example shown in FIG. 14-1(A), the obtained number display of "120 points" is displayed corresponding to the fact that the number of obtained and put out balls is 120 pieces.

For display of the winning number, numbers for displaying the number of winning balls and characters other than the numbers for recognizing the display of the winning number are used. The numerals used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like. The winning number display shown in FIG. 14-1(A) has the letters "point" for recognizing that it is the winning number display and the number "120" for displaying the number of prize balls. used.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters in which a specific area is formed. Here, the specific area is an area surrounded by the lines forming the character, and is an area not connected to the area outside the lines forming the character. Here, "not leading to the area outside the line forming the character" means that the "specific area" is completely isolated from the "area outside the line forming the character" by the "line forming the character". and the case where the "specific area" is not completely separated from the "area outside the lines forming the characters" by the "lines forming the characters" but appears to be a different area at first glance. ,including. In the following description, a character in which a specific area is formed will be referred to as a "specific character".

For example, in the case of Arabic numerals, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. That is, in the case of Arabic numerals "0", "6", "8", and "9", the specific area is a substantially circular area surrounded by curves forming the characters. The Arabic numeral "8" is formed with two specific areas. For the Arabic numeral "4", the triangular area surrounded by the three straight lines forming the character is the specific area.

In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. do. In the example shown in FIG. 14-1(A), a background image of a flying "butterfly" is displayed during a big win. The background image during the big win is an image displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the big win game state. The background video during the jackpot includes many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The display of the number of acquisitions is displayed in a small size in an end area that does not hinder the visibility of the background image during the big win in the display area of the image display device. If the background image during the big win changes over time, the line of the background image during the big win may overlap behind the display of the number of wins. Then, when a specific character is displayed on the display of the number of acquisitions, the big hit is behind the specific area of the specific character, such as the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in Fig. 14-1(A). If the lines of the middle background image overlap, the line of the middle background image of the big win may be assimilated with the line forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be different from the original character.

FIG. 14-1(B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-1(A). In the examples shown in FIGS. 14-1 (A) and (B), the line of the background image "Butterfly" during the big win is superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of wins, The line of 'butterfly' in the background image during the big win is assimilated with the line forming the specific character '0', and the specific character '0' looks like the Arabic numeral '8' instead of the Arabic numeral '0'.

In this way, if the characters of the winning number display are misidentified as characters different from the original characters, it is impossible to accurately recognize the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line included in the background image during the big win so that the line of the background image during the big win does not overlap the specific area of the specific character.

The first form of the characteristic portion 20SH has been made in view of such a background. A first form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described below.

(Acquisition number display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 14-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the acquired number in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

In the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH, the specific area 20SHI1 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters among the Arabic numerals used for displaying the acquired number is , are displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. In the example shown in FIG. 14-2(A), the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS1 used to display the acquired number is "black", whereas the specific characters "0", "4", and "6" are displayed. , “8”, and “9” are displayed in “white”.

Further, the display mode of the specific region 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character, and the character is displayed to the extent that the specific region 20SHI1 and the line 20SHS1 forming the character can be accurately distinguished. Any display mode having a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed may be used.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color with a high contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be brightness with a high contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be texture that has a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture having a high contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Of the characters used to display the number of wins, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the number of winning balls, and specific characters among characters other than numbers for making it recognizable as the number of wins are also shown in Figure 14- Like the Arabic numerals shown in 2(A), the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode that is different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 14-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

The pachinko game machine 1 displays a winning number notification display for notifying that the number of awarded balls reaches a predetermined number in a big win game state. - 特許庁

Here, the time saving control and the variable probability control that are executed after the end of the big hit gaming state are that the special game is executed a predetermined number of times, or before the special game is executed a predetermined number of times. However, for example, the number of times of time reduction control and variable probability control may be different for each jackpot type, and in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high that is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state The definite control and the time saving control may be continuously executed until a big win occurs again after the big win game state is ended. In such a case, the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is a so-called continuous game state.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the consecutive game state, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state of plural times in the consecutive game state reaches a predetermined number, it displays the acquisition number notification display for notifying that fact. do.

When the number of winning balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the winning number notification display, a number for displaying the predetermined number and a character other than the number for recognizing that the winning number notification display is displayed. and are used. The numerals used for the acquisition number notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

Among the characters used for the acquisition number notification display, there are characters corresponding to the specific characters. In the first form of the characterizing portion 20SH, as shown in FIG. 14-2(B), the specific area of the specific characters used for display of the number of acquisitions is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 14-2(B), among the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" are identified. The area 20SHI2 is displayed in a transparent display mode.

Among the characters used for the winning number notification display, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the predetermined number when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has been reached, or the winning number notification display. Specific characters among characters other than numerals for recognition are also displayed in a transparent display mode in specific areas, such as Arabic numerals shown in FIG. 14B.

(Appearance of acquisition number display in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIG. 14-3(A) is a diagram showing how the obtained number display looks in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH. FIG. 14-3(B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-1(A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 14-3 (A) and (B), the line of the background image "Butterfly" during the big win is superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the winning number display 20SHK. However, since the specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white", the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI1. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI1, the "butterfly" line 20SHHS of the background image during the big win is not assimilated with the line 20SHS1 forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" is accurately represented as the Arabic numeral "0". can recognize.

On the image display device 5, in addition to the winning number display 20SHK, a big win display 20SHO for recognizing that it is controlled to the big win game state, and a big win combination derived and displayed when it is controlled to the big win game state. A decoration symbol display 20SHZ indicating a fixed decoration symbol, a round number display 20SHR indicating the round number of the round game in the jackpot game state, and a right-handed display 20SHM suggesting that the player should hit to the right are displayed. It is The jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are also placed in the end regions that do not hinder the visibility of the background image during the big win in the display area of the image display device 5, similarly to the winning number display 20SHK. displayed small.

The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-handed display 20SHM are the same type of characters as the winning number display 20SHK and winning number notification display, and the winning number display 20SHK and winning. A character different from the character used for number notification display may be included. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-4, "numbers" and "katakana" are used for the characters of the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH. On the other hand, the jackpot display 20SHO uses "alphabet" and "kanji" which are different types of characters from the characters used for the number-of-wins display 20SHK and the number-of-wins notification display. Also, the decoration symbol display 20SHZ uses "numbers" which are the same type of characters as the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display. In the round number display 20SHR, the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display are the same type of characters as "numbers", and the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display are different. "Alphabet", which is a type of character, is used. The right-handed display 20SHM uses "kanji", "hiragana", and "symbols", which are different types of characters from the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display.

Among the characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-handed display 20SHM, there are characters corresponding to specific characters regardless of the type of the characters. The specific areas of the specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are also in a non-transparent display mode, similar to the specific area 20SHI1 for the winning number display 20SHK. Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI1.

(Example of production operation of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 14-4 is a diagram showing an effect operation example of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display.

In this embodiment, the display area of the image display device 5 is, as shown in FIG. Various displays are performed by distinguishing the second display area 20SH52 narrower than 20SH51. In the example shown in FIG. 14-4(A), the area inside the two-dot chain line is the first display area 20SH51, and the area outside the two-dot chain line is the second display area 20SH52.

As shown in FIG. 14-4(A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the background image during the big win in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquisition number display 20SHK on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 . In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-4(A), the second display area 20SH52 also displays a big win display, a decorative symbol display, a round number display, and a right-handed display.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the big winning hole. In FIG. 14-4(A), since the acquisition number display 20SHK with "point 990" is displayed, it can be recognized that 990 game balls have been paid out as prize balls in the jackpot game state. can. The effect control CPU 120 updates the number of the winning number display 20SHK each time a game ball is paid out in the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, it is assumed that game balls enter the big winning hole and 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In response to the fact that 15 game balls have been paid out, the effect control CPU 120 changes the number of the acquired number display 20SHK from "990" as shown in FIGS. It counts up by one until "1005". In that case, the number of 20 SHK obtained is passed through the so-called "Kiriban", which is a rounded number of "1000". In other words, the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state has reached "1000".

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquired number notification display every time "1000" game balls are paid out in the jackpot game state. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquired number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls in the big win game state reaches "1000", and the number of prize balls in the big win game state is "2000". , the number-of-acquisitions notification display of ``Over 2000'' is displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 notifies the acquired number at the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. A part of display 20SHKH is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-4(E) to 14-4(G), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed in each frame of the image while the number of the acquisition number display 20SHK changes from "1000" to "1005". The display position of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is moved from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center of the first display area 20SH51. Then, when the number of the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes "1005", the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquisition number in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14-4(G). The notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed. At this time, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

With such display control, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame-in from the outside to the inside of the display area of the image display device 5 .

Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH started to be displayed, the effect control CPU 120 ends the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. In the example shown in FIG. 14-4(H), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH displayed in each frame of the video from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Move to the left edge of the area.

With such display control, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame out from the inside to the outside of the display area of the image display device 5, and is no longer displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. finish.

The effect control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is started by displaying a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when the number of the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes "Kiriban", and from that timing. Display control may be performed to terminate the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 considers that the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has been started by stopping and displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and for a predetermined period from that timing. display control may be performed to end the display of the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH when .

As described above, the specific area of the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a transparent display mode. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 14-4(E) to (H), the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters used for the winning number notification display 20SHKH. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 14-4(E) to (H), the background image during the big win can be seen from the specific area of the Arabic numeral "0", which is the specific character used for the winning number notification display 20SHKH.

Also, the characters used for the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the number of acquisitions display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 14-4(D) to (H).

It should be noted that the effect mode when the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 is not limited to the mode of frame-in the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH, stopping and then out of the frame. For example, instead of making the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH frame-in, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be projected from the back side of the screen to the front side, or the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may gradually emerge. Alternatively, a character may appear and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed in a speech balloon showing the character's lines. In addition, instead of rendering the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH out of the frame, it is possible to make the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH be sucked from the front side of the screen to the back side of the screen, or to make the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH disappear gradually. Alternatively, when the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a balloon showing the character's lines, the character may leave.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display the background image during the big win corresponding to the big win game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded balls in front of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, at least in the first display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during the big win, the number of acquisitions for notifying that the number of prize balls given in the big win game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As the notification display 20SHKH, when the number of awarded balls in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the winning number notification display of "over 1000", and the prize balls given in the jackpot game state. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquired number notification display of "over 2000". The win number display 20SHK is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends when a predetermined period of time has passed since the display started. The characters used for the number-of-acquisitions notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the number-of-acquisitions display 20SHK. Characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used for the winning number display 20SHK, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, the number-of-wins display 20SHK and the number-of-wins notification display 20SHKH including the specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the background image during the big win. For example, when the player confirms the number of winning balls in the jackpot game state, the player confirms the winning number display 20SHK. To make the background image during a big win invisible from a specific area of the specific character, when the background image during the big win can be seen from the specific area of the character, and the specific character may look different from the original character. Therefore, the specific characters can be recognized accurately. In addition, unlike the winning number display 20SHK, the winning number notification display 20SHKH is not always displayed in the big win game state, but is started when the number of prize balls provided in the big win game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the sense of congratulating the winner, and since it is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, it is possible to visually recognize the background image during the big win from the specific area of the specific characters. By doing so, it is possible to show even a little of the background image during the big win in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

Also, as described above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals '0', '4', '6', '8' and '9'.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display 20SHKH using Arabic numerals in relation to the background image during the big win.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH while displaying the acquisition number display 20SHK.

According to such a configuration, even when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed, the winning number display 20SHK allows the player to accurately grasp the number of winning balls in the big win game state.

In addition, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

According to such a configuration, the winning number notification display 20SHKH is easily visible to the player, and it is possible to preferably notify that the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". .

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM on the front side of the background image during the jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. is. The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-handed display 20SHM are the same type of characters as those used for the winning number display 20SHK and winning number notification display 20SHKH, and the winning number display 20SHK and Characters different from those used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are included, and each type of character includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed. As for the specific characters used for the big win display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-handed display 20SHM, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to accurately recognize specific characters in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decoration symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can stop and display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51, and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is frame-in to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display was started, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed out.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed.

(Second form of characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the second form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-5 to 14-7. In the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH, the specific characters used for the number-of-acquisitions notification display 20SHKH are larger than the specific characters used for the number-of-acquisitions display 20SHK for the area of the lines forming the characters. Portion size proportions small.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the second form of the characteristic portion 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 14-5(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the characterizing part 20SH uses three-dimensional characters for the acquisition number notification display. Here, a three-dimensional character is a character format that makes the character appear to protrude from the front side. The area of lines forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS21 that expresses the character and an area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the three-dimensional character.

Among such three-dimensional characters, there are characters corresponding to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 14-5(A), among three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for acquisition number notification display, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI3 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the background image during the big win, the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters)
FIG. 14-5(B) is an explanatory diagram for comparing the non-stereoscopic characters used to display the number of wins and the three-dimensional characters used to display the number of wins.

Comparing the non-three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions with the three-dimensional characters used for notifying the number of acquisitions, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional characters and the size of the line area forming the three-dimensional characters are as follows: The size of the area 20SHS21 expressing characters is the same as that of the area 20SHS21. In the non-stereoscopic specific character, the specific area 20SHI1 is the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the character. On the other hand, in the three-dimensional specific character, since the region of lines forming the character includes the region 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the character, the outline of the inner circumference of the region 20SHS21 expressing the character and the The area surrounded by the outline of the area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the character is the specific area 20SHI3. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific characters used for acquisition number notification display are located in the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the characters located inside the area 20SHS21 expressing the characters, rather than the non-three-dimensional specific characters used for the acquisition number display. The size of the specific region is reduced by the size, and the ratio of the size of the specific region to the size of the line region forming the character is reduced.

(Modified example of acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 14-6(A) is a diagram showing a modification 1 of the display mode of the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-6(A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, ``0'', ``4'', ``6'', ``8'', and ``9'' correspond to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI4 is displayed in "white", and when it is displayed in front of the background video during the big win, the background video during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific region 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters in modification 1)
FIG. 14-6B is an explanatory diagram for comparing the non-three-dimensional characters used to display the number of wins with the three-dimensional characters used to display the number of wins, according to Modification 1. FIG.

Also in Modified Example 1, when comparing the non-stereoscopic characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions with the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions, it is found that the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-stereoscopic characters and the size of the area 20SHI1 forming the 3D characters. The size of the area 20SH31 representing the character in the area of the lines is the same size. In the non-stereoscopic specific character, the specific area 20SHI1 is the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the character. On the other hand, in the three-dimensional specific character, since the area of lines forming the character includes the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the character, the outline of the inner circumference of the area 20SH31 expressing the character and the character on the inner circumference side of the area 20SH31 express the character. The area surrounded by the outline of the area 20SH32 representing the depth of the image is the specific area 20SHI4. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific characters used for acquisition number notification display are located in the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the character located on the inner peripheral side of the area 20SH31 expressing the characters than the non-three-dimensional specific characters used for the acquisition number display. The size of the specific region is reduced by the size, and the ratio of the size of the specific region to the size of the line region forming the character is reduced.

(Modified example of acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 14-7(A) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the display mode of the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH.

In Modified Example 2, as shown in FIG. 14-7(A), the characters used for the acquisition number notification display are displayed with three-color gradation in the area of the lines forming the characters. The combination is displayed in one of display modes A to G, which are different from each other.

The area of the line forming the character of the display mode A is colored with three color gradations: "red" for the upper area 20SHSU, "orange" for the central area 20SHSC, and "yellow" for the lower area 20SHSD. The areas of the lines forming the characters in the display mode B are colored with three gradation colors: "orange" for the upper area 20SHSU, "yellow" for the central area 20SHSC, and "green" for the lower area 20SHSD. The area of the line forming the character of the display mode C is colored with three gradations of "yellow" for the upper area 20SHSU, "green" for the central area 20SHSC, and "light blue" for the lower area 20SHSD. The areas of the lines forming the characters in the display mode D are colored with three gradation colors: "green" for the upper area 20SHSU, "light blue" for the central area 20SHSC, and "blue" for the lower area 20SHSD. The area of the line forming the character of the display mode E is colored with three color gradations: "light blue" for the upper area 20SHSU, "blue" for the central area 20SHSC, and "purple" for the lower area 20SHSD. The areas of the lines forming the characters of the display mode F are colored with three gradation colors: "blue" for the upper area 20SHSU, "purple" for the central area 20SHSC, and "red" for the lower area 20SHSD. The area of the line forming the character of the display mode G is colored with three color gradations: "purple" for the upper area 20SHSU, "red" for the central area 20SHSC, and "yellow" for the lower area 20SHSD.

The image display device 5 changes the character modes used for the acquisition number notification display to display mode A→display mode B→display mode C→display mode D→display mode E→display mode F→display mode G→display mode A→ . . , and displayed while changing with time.

FIG. 14-7(B) is a diagram showing an example of a change in color accompanying the display operation for notifying the number of acquisitions in Modification 2. As shown in FIG.

In modification 2, as shown in FIG. 14-7(B), when the obtained number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, the obtained number notification display is moved (frame-in/out). The speed at which the display mode of the acquisition count notification display changes differs between when the frame is out).

In the example shown in FIG. 14-7(B), the acquired number notification display takes 0.35 seconds to move (frame-in) from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51. , from the display mode A to the display mode D in order. After that, the acquired number display changes from display mode D to display mode G in order while it is stopped for one second in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and displayed. After that, the acquisition number notification display is moved (framed out) from the center of the first display area 20SH51 to the left end of the display area of the image display device 5 over 0.35 seconds, while the display modes G to C are sequentially displayed. Change.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display the background image during the big win corresponding to the big win game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display related to the number of awarded balls on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, at least in the first display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during the big win, the number of acquisitions for notifying that the number of prize balls given in the big win game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As a notification display, when the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the winning number notification display of "over 1000", and the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display "over 2000". The winning number display is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period of time elapses after the display is started. The characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions are larger in size than the characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions. The characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions and the display of the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. In addition, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters used for displaying the number of wins. Further, the specific characters used for the display of the number of acquired characters have a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the lines forming the characters than the specific characters used for the display of the acquired number.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image during the big win. For example, when the player confirms the number of winning balls in the jackpot game state, the player confirms the display of the winning number, but the display of the winning number is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52. If the background video during the big win is visible from the specific area, the specific characters may look different from the original characters. Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

Also, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display are three-dimensional characters. The area of the lines that form the three-dimensional character includes an area that expresses the character and an area that expresses the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the acquisition number notification display.

In addition, as described above, the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific characters used for the display of the number of winnings.

According to such a configuration, the winning number notification display is not always displayed in the big win game state like the winning number display, but the number of prize balls awarded in the big win game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time in order to congratulate the player when the character is drawn, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and the size of the line areas 20SHS21 and 20SHS22 forming the characters. Since the ratio of the size of the specific area 20SHI3 to the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character is small, even if the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character, the risk of misrecognizing the character can be suppressed. By making the background image visible during the big hit from 20SHI3, the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, as described above, in the specific character used for displaying the number of wins in the modified example 1, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI4.

According to such a configuration, the winning number notification display is not always displayed in the big win game state like the winning number display, but the number of prize balls awarded in the big win game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time in the sense of congratulating the player when the character is drawn, and is displayed in a large size character in the wide first display area 20SH51, and is a specific area relative to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Since the size ratio is small, it is possible not only to suppress discomfort even if the background image during the big win is not visible from the specific area of the specific character, but also to prevent the background image during the big win from being visible from the specific area of the specific character. By doing so, it is possible to prevent misidentification of characters.

Further, as described above, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display in Modification 2 are displayed in three-color gradation in the line area forming the characters. Then, the image display device 5 sets the mode of the characters used for the acquisition number notification display to display mode A→display mode B→display mode C→display mode D→display mode E→display mode F→display mode G→display mode. The display is changed over time in the order of A → . . . When the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out), the acquisition number notification display is changed. The speed at which the display mode changes is different.

According to such a configuration, since the display mode changes according to the moving speed of the acquisition number notification display, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(Description of Third Mode of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-8 to 14-11. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH, the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters used for the result display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Arabic numerals used for result display)
FIG. 14-8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for result display in the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When the round game of the final round is finished, the pachinko game machine 1 executes an ending performance corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ending background image. In addition, the image display device 5 displays a result display that notifies the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state while displaying the ending background image.

For the result display, numbers for displaying the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state and characters other than the numbers for recognizing the result display are used. The numbers used for result display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

Among the characters used for the result display, there are characters corresponding to specific characters. In the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH, as shown in FIG. 14-8, the specific area of the specific character used for result display is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 14-8, the specific area 20SHI5 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters among the Arabic numerals used for the result display is transparent. is displayed in the display mode.

Of the characters used for result display, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state and characters other than numbers for recognizing the result display are also shown in FIG. A specific area is displayed in a transparent display mode, such as the Arabic numerals indicated by -8.

(Various productions in the jackpot game state)
FIG. 14-9 is a diagram showing an example of an effect period of various effects in the jackpot game state. FIG. 14-10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of various effects in the jackpot game state.

The effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a reservation-in-reservation advance notice suggesting control to the jackpot game state corresponding to the stored reservation information when the reservation information is stored in the jackpot game state. be. For example, in the case of a jackpot game state of all 10 rounds, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-9 and FIGS. At timing T1 at which a round game of 10 rounds, which is a round, is started, the reservation notice is started.

When the reservation notice is executed, the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 corresponds to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 14-10(B). In front of the background image during the big hit, the effect image of the reservation notice is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 14-10(B), the effect image 20SHE of "flame" is displayed as the effect image of the reservation notice.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 14-10(B), the effect image "flame" line is superimposed on the back side of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquired number display 20SHK, Since the specific area is displayed in "white", the effect image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. Therefore, in the specific area, the line of the "flame" of the effect image is not assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0". .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-9 and 14-10 (B) to (C), when the round game of the final round is finished and the ending effect is started at timing T2, the effect control CPU 120 End the Renso notice and start the ending production. When the ending effect starts, in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, the ending background image starts to be displayed with a predetermined brightness. In the example shown in FIG. 14-10(C), in the first display area 20SH51, an ending background image of falling cherry blossoms falling from the back of the screen is displayed. In addition, in front of the ending background image, characters of "jackpot end" are displayed corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 ends the on-hold advance notice before the display of the ending background image starts at the timing T2. Therefore, when the ending background image is being displayed, the effect image 20SHE of the pending advance notice is not displayed. In other words, the effect image 20SHE of the reservation preview is displayed when the ending background image is not displayed.

The ending background image may be an image that is displayed at least in the first display area 20SH51, and is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 as shown in FIG. There may be In the example shown in FIG. 14-10(D), the falling cherry blossoms displayed as the ending background image are dancing over the entire screen.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-9 and 14-10 (D) to (E), at the timing T3 when the result display is started, the effect control CPU 120 sets the brightness of the ending background image to be higher than the predetermined brightness. Reduces the brightness to a specific dark level, pauses the progress of the ending background image, and displays it as a still image. Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the result display 20SHRE on the front side of the ending background image with brightness brighter than the specific brightness of the still image of the ending background image. In the example shown in FIG. 14-10(E), the falling cherry blossoms have stopped, and the result display 20SHRE is displayed in white characters.

As described above, the specific characters used for the result display 20SHRE are displayed with the specific area 20SHI5 being transparent. Therefore, for the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE, the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5.

The characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 14-10(A), (B), and (E). Also, the result display 20SHRE may be displayed at least in the first display area 20SH51, and is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 as shown in FIG. 14-10(E). It may happen.

(Suggestion of setting by ending background video)
FIG. 14-11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of a setting suggesting effect using an ending background image.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, by using the display result determination table according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball output rate, and "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6". The higher the value, the higher the payout rate. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the degree of advantage for the player is the lowest, and the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". Benefit increases step by step. In this embodiment, set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings" and set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings."

The pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH is configured to be able to change the setting value, and is configured to be able to display the above-described ending background image as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting the setting value. For example, when the setting value is low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which cherry blossoms are falling from the back of the screen, as shown in FIG. 14-11(A). On the other hand, when the setting value is high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which a large amount of snowstorms of cherry blossoms are falling from the left and right cherry trees in full bloom, as shown in FIG. 14-11(B).

It should be noted that the setting suggestion by the ending background video does not necessarily suggest whether the setting value is low or high. For example, when the setting value is low, the ending background image shown in FIG. 14-11(B) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the setting value is high In addition, the ending background image shown in FIG. 14-11(A) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate.

In addition, the ending background image may have different presentation modes depending on whether the setting value is "6", which is the highest advantage for the player, or when the setting value is not "6". Also, the ending background image may have a different rendering mode depending on whether the set value is an odd number or the set value is an even number.

Here, the above-mentioned Renso announcement on hold is one of a plurality of types of announcement effects for heralding the degree of reliability of a big hit, but the setting suggesting effect by the Renso announcement on hold is not executed.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characterizing portion 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a background image during a big win corresponding to progress of the round game in the big win game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state at least in the first display area 20SH51. Further, when the ending background image is not displayed, the image display device 5 controls the big win game state in response to the hold information stored on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. It is possible to display an effect image 20SHE of an advance notice of a reservation that suggests that it will be held. In addition, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded balls in front of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 displays a result in front of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51 to notify the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state. Display 20SHRE can be displayed. The characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK. The characters used in the winning number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, the background image during the big win and the effect image 20SHRE for notifying the reservation are not visible from the specific area. On the other hand, for the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE, the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5.

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display 20SHK including the specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the background image during the big win and the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the reservation. can be preferably displayed in relation to the ending background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of winning balls in the jackpot game state, the player confirms the winning number display 20SHK. Since it may overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the Sho notice, if the background image during the big hit or the effect image 20SHE of the reservation notice is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character will look different from the original character. However, by making the background image during the big win and the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the reservation inside the reservation invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be recognized accurately. On the other hand, the result display 20SHRE is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and since it does not overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the reservation notice, the ending background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters. By making it possible, it is possible to show the ending background image even a little in the conspicuous display position of the first display area 20SH51.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can display the ending background image in a manner suggesting the set value. The effect image 20SHRE of the pending notice is one of a plurality of types of notice effects for predicting the degree of reliability of the big win, but the setting suggesting effect by the pending notice is not executed.

According to such a configuration, since there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect is executed by the ending background image, it is significant that the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5 of the specific character used for the result display 20SHRE. increase.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background image with a predetermined brightness. Then, at the timing T3 when the result display 20SHRE is started to be displayed, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background image with a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and also displays the ending background video with a brightness brighter than the specific brightness. Display the result display 20SHRE.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the visibility of the result display 20SHRE.

(Description of Fourth Mode of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
Next, a game machine relating to the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-12 to 14-16. In the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH, the remaining number of times display relating to the remaining number of times of the ST number in the variable probability state, and when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of times is notified. and the remaining number of times notification display can be displayed. The characters used for the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific character used to display the remaining number of times is such that the background image during the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. The background image in the ST can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used for the display of the number of remaining times.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Background Art Related to Fourth Form of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
14-12 are diagrams showing background art related to the fourth form of the feature portion 20SH.

In a pachinko machine, basically, when comparing a state that is advantageous to the player, such as a variable probability state, a time-saving state, and a jackpot game state, and a normal state, the game is played in the normal state rather than the period in which the game is played in the advantageous state. is designed to be longer.

For example, in a pachinko machine, regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game, when the upper limit number of pending information is stored, when the upper limit number of pending information is not stored. A shortened variation with a shorter variable display time is more likely to be executed. And, in the probability variable state with the time reduction control, since the variable winning ball device changes to the open state, winning is more likely than in the normal state, so the shortening variation is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and faster than in the normal state. It is possible to progress the game. Therefore, the period during which the game is played in the normal state is longer than the period in which the game is played in the variable probability state accompanied by the time saving control.

In the variable probability control, after the end of the jackpot game state, either the condition of when the special game of the predetermined number of times is executed or when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" is met first. end when Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "big hit" while the variable probability control is being performed, the variable probability control ends when the special figure game of the predetermined number of STs is consumed. . Note that the predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time of the special symbols in the special symbol game is shortened compared to when the time saving control is not performed. In the time-saving control, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, one of the following conditions is established first: that the special game is executed for a predetermined number of times of time-saving, or that the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit". end when Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "jackpot" when the time saving control is performed, the time saving control ends when the special game of the predetermined number of time saving times is completed. . In addition, the predetermined number of times of time saving is, for example, 70 times.

In addition, it is good also as a value different from the setting value of the number of times of ST, and the setting value of the number of times of time saving.

When the pachinko game machine is controlled to the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 14-12 (A), there is a case where the remaining number display regarding the remaining number of ST times in the variable probability state is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 14-12(A), the remaining number display of "30 remaining times" is displayed corresponding to the remaining number of ST times being 30 times.

For the display of the remaining number of times, a number for displaying the remaining number of STs and characters other than the number for recognizing the display of the remaining number of times are used. The numbers used to display the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like. The remaining number display shown in FIG. 14-12(A) includes the characters "remaining" and "times" for recognizing that it is the remaining number display, and "30" for displaying the remaining number of STs. and numbers are used.

Among the characters used for displaying the remaining number of times, there is a specific character in which a specific area is formed.

In addition, when the pachinko game machine is controlled to the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. do. In the example shown in FIG. 14-12(A), the background image during ST is displayed in such a manner that the screen is cracked. The ST background image is an image displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the variable probability state. The background image in the ST includes many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The display of the remaining number of times is displayed in a small size in an end area that does not interfere with the visibility of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the display area of the image display device. If the ST background image changes over time, the line of the ST background image may overlap behind the display of the remaining number of times. Then, when a specific character is displayed in the remaining count display, ST is displayed on the back of the specific area of the specific character, such as the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-12(A). When the lines of the medium image overlap, the lines of the background image in the ST may be assimilated with the lines forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be different from the original character.

FIG. 14-12(B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-12(A). In the examples shown in FIGS. 14-12 (A) and (B), the line of the background image during the ST is superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the remaining number of times, and the background image during the ST merges with the line forming the specific character "0" so that the specific character "0" looks like the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the character of the remaining number display is mistakenly recognized as a character different from the original character, the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line of the ST background image so that the line of the ST background image does not overlap the specific area of the specific character.

The fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH has been made in view of such a background, and the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described below.

(Remaining count display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIGS. 14-13 are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

In the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH, the specific area 20SHI6 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters among the Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times is , is displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In the example shown in FIGS. 14-13, the color of the line 20SHS6 of the Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of remaining times is "black", whereas the specific characters "0", "4", "6", " The specific areas 20SHI6 of 8" and "9" are displayed in "white", and when displayed in front of the background image during the ST, the background image during the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6.

In addition, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the pun, and the characters are displayed to the extent that the specific area 20SHI6 and the line 20SHS6 forming the character can be accurately distinguished. Any display mode having a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS6 to be formed may be used.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with a high contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be brightness with a high contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be texture that has a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 that forms the character. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture having a high contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Of the characters used to display the remaining number of times, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the remaining number of STs, and specific characters among characters other than numbers for making the remaining number of times displayed are shown in the figure. Like the Arabic numerals shown in 14-13, the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode that is different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Remaining count notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIG. 14-14 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for the display of the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH.

When the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko game machine 1 displays a remaining number notification display for notifying the predetermined number.

When the number of remaining times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the remaining number of times notification display includes a number for displaying the predetermined number of times, and characters other than the number for making the remaining number of times notification display recognizable. and are used. The numerals used for the remaining number notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 14-14, the display of the number of remaining times is displayed in a plurality of modes with different transmittances. 14-14(A) is a display mode in which the line area forming the characters of the remaining number of times notification display is not transparent, and the background of the characters cannot be seen from the line area. The remaining number of times notification display shown in FIG. 14-14(B) is a display mode in which the line area forming the characters of the remaining number of times notification display is transparent, and the background of the characters can be seen through the line area.

In addition, the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in three-dimensional characters. In the display mode in which the character background is not visible, the line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS71 that expresses the character and an area 20SHS72A that expresses the depth of the three-dimensional character. In the display mode in which the background of the character is visible, the area 20SHS71 for expressing the character is transparently displayed. This area is displayed as an area 20SHS72B representing the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character.

Among such three-dimensional characters, there are characters corresponding to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 14-14, the specific areas of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters of the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the remaining number notification display 20SHI7 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the ST background image, the ST background image can be visually recognized from the specific region 20SHI7.

As shown in FIG. 14-14, the specific area 20SHI7 for the remaining number of times notification display differs depending on whether the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in a non-transmissive manner or in a transparent manner. In the example shown in FIG. 14-14, the remaining count notification display is displayed in an opaque manner, and since the area of the lines forming the characters includes the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the characters, the area expressing the characters A specific area 20SHI7 is an area surrounded by the outline of the inner circumference of 20SHS71 and the outline of the area 20SHS72A that expresses the depth of the character located on the inner circumference side. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 14-14(B), the remaining count notification display is displayed in a transparent manner, and since the area 20SHS71 representing characters is displayed transparently, the bottom surface of the three-dimensional characters is expressed. The area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS72B is the specific area 20SHI7.

(Appearance of Remaining Count Display in Fourth Form of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
FIG. 14-15(A) is a diagram showing how the remaining count display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH looks. FIG. 14-15(B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-15(A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 14-15 (A) and (B), the line of the background image during ST overlaps behind the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the remaining number display 20SHST, but the specific area Since 20SHI6 is displayed in "white", the background image in the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6. Therefore, the specific region 20SHI6 is not assimilated with the line 20SHHS2 of the background image in the ST, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0".

In addition to the remaining count display 20SHST, the image display device 5 also displays an acquisition count display 20SHK, a right-handed display 20SHM, and a variable probability display 20SHRU for recognizing that the variable probability state is controlled. there is Acquisition number display 20SHK, right-handed display 20SHM, probability variation display 20SHRU are also displayed small in the end area of the display area of the image display device 5 so as not to impede the visibility of the decoration pattern, like the remaining number display 20SHST.

The characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability display 20SHRU are the same type of characters as the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display, and the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display. It may contain different types of characters than the characters that can be used. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-17, "numbers", "hiragana" and "kanji" are used for the remaining number display 20SHST and remaining number notification display 20SHSTH. On the other hand, the variable probability display 20SHRU uses "alphabet" which is a different type of characters from the characters used in the remaining count display 20SHST and the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH. In addition, the acquisition number display 20SHK includes "numbers" which are the same type of characters as the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, and the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and remaining number notification display 20SHSTH. A different type of character, katakana, is used. In addition, the right-handed display 20SHM includes "hiragana" and "kanji" which are the same type of characters as the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number reporting display 20SHSTH, and the remaining number display 20SHST and remaining number reporting display 20SHSTH. "Symbols", which are different types of characters from the characters used, are used.

Among the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK, the right-hand hitting display 20SHM, and the odd probability display 20SHRU, there are characters corresponding to specific characters regardless of the type of the character. The specific areas of the specific characters used for the winning number display 20SHK, the right hitting display 20SHM, and the odds display 20SHRU are also in a non-transparent display mode, similar to the specific area 20SHI6 for the remaining number display 20SHST, and the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode, the background image during the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6.

(Example of effect operation of remaining count display and remaining count notification display in the fourth form of characteristic portion 20SH)
FIGS. 14-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the variable display in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH and the change in the display mode of the remaining count notification display. 14-17 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display in the first form of the characterizing portion 20SH.

As shown in FIGS. 14-17, the effect control CPU 120 displays the remaining number display 20SHST in the second display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 14-17 (A) to (B), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number for displaying the remaining number of STs of the remaining number display 20 SHST each time the variable display is executed. to display.

As shown in FIGS. 14-16 and 14-17 (A) to (B), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number of times. The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times is started to be displayed in a non-transmissive display mode. For example, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the number of times when the variable display of 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, and 10 times indicated by the remaining number display is started. The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is started in a non-transmissive display mode. As shown in FIGS. 14-17(B) to (D), the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger in size than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST. In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 14-17, when the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK is also displayed. It is displayed in a display area different from the area. Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-16 and 14-17 (B) to (C), when the first period has passed since the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH started, the effect control CPU 120 The display mode of the number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changed from a non-transmissive display mode to a transparent display mode. Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-16 and 14-17 (B) to (E), when the second period has passed since the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changed, the effect control CPU 120 The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is terminated.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform variable display based on a plurality of types of variation patterns with different variable display times.

The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches the predetermined number of times. Therefore, if the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed over a plurality of variable displays, there is a possibility that the remaining number of STs may be misunderstood.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the first period and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are displayed in a display mode in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not transparent so that the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be terminated in one variable display. The total period including the second period of display in the transmissive display mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, even if the variable display based on any type of variation pattern is executed, The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be ended in the one variable display.

Here, the first display area 20SH51 includes the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R described above. On the other hand, the number-of-remaining notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in front of the identification information in at least the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first display area 20SH51. Therefore, if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the non-transmissive remaining time information display 20SHSTH is displayed, there is a possibility that the display result cannot be recognized.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to allow the user to recognize the display result of the variable display, the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a non-transmissive display mode is a variation pattern with the shortest variable display time. is set to end before the timing at which the display result in the variable display is derived.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, even if the variable display based on any type of variation pattern is executed, The display result of the variable display can be favorably recognized.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-17(D), the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed when the display result of the variable display is derived. Because of the change, the identification information behind the characters can be visually recognized from the area of the lines forming the characters of the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH.

In this embodiment, change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is controlled so that the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. However, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is a predetermined number of times, the remaining number of times is temporarily stopped when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notification display 20SHSTH may be displayed in a transparent display mode.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH can be controlled to a probability variable state accompanied by time-saving control that allows the game to proceed faster than the normal state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display the ST background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state on the front side of the ST background image in the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times displayed on the front side of the ST background image in at least the first display area 20SH51. As the display 20SHSTH, there is a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH that notifies "60" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 60, and "When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50" 50” can be displayed. The remaining number display 20SHST is updated each time the variable display is performed. On the other hand, the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of display. The characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger in size than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST. The characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include specific areas surrounded by lines forming the characters. As for the specific characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the background image during the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH, the background video during the ST can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI7.

According to such a configuration, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH including the specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the ST background image. For example, when the player confirms the remaining ST number in the variable probability state, the remaining number display 20SHST is confirmed, but the remaining number display 20SHST is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, If the background image in the ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character, but the background image in the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character. By doing so, the specific character can be accurately recognized. Further, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not always displayed like the remaining number of times display 20SHST. It is displayed only for a period of time, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51. At the conspicuous display position of the display area 20SH51, it is possible to show even a little of the background image during the ST.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the characters used for the number-of-remaining notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back side can be seen through the lines forming the characters. be.

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be visually recognized while the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary stress from being given to the player.

In addition, as described above, the first display area 20SH51 includes the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative design in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

According to such a configuration, the variable display of the decoration pattern can be visually recognized when the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, so that unnecessary stress can be prevented from being given to the player. .

Further, as described above, when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the image display device 5 displays it in a display mode in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is transparent.

According to such a configuration, even if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

In addition, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded balls. Then, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the obtained number display 20SHK from deteriorating due to the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH.

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. The present invention is also applied to a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button. It is possible.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 20SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the first form of the characterizing part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled in a jackpot game state). etc.), display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is the first display area 20SH51 and the area around the first display area 20SH51); and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51), the display means displays a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. Displayable (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image during the big win corresponding to the big win gaming state in the first display region 20SH51 and the second display region 20SH52, etc.), and the second display In the area, it is possible to display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given in front of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display the background video during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. (20 SHK, etc., can be displayed on the front side), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, the amount of game value provided is a predetermined amount. As notification display for notifying that the amount of game value provided has reached the first predetermined amount, and notification display that indicates that the amount of game value provided has reached the second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 displays at least in the first display area 20SH51 the number of prize balls given in the big win game state on the front side of the background image during the big win. Acquisition number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of "Kiriban" has been reached, and when the number of awarded balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the acquisition number notification display "1000 over" is displayed. display is possible, and when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", it is possible to display the winning number notification display of "over 2000", etc.); It is updated each time a game value is given in the advantageous state (for example, the winning number display 20SHK is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), and the notification display is: The display is terminated when a specific period of time has passed since the display was started (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is to be terminated when a predetermined period of time has passed since the display was started), and the notification is made. The characters used for display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the display of the given amount (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK). characters, etc.), and the characters used for the display of the amount to be applied and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, the number of acquisitions display 20 SHK and the number of acquisitions The characters used for the notification display 20SHKH include specific characters forming a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used for the application amount display include the background image from the specific area. is not visible (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number display 20SHK is such that the background image during the big hit cannot be seen from the specific area), and the specific character used for the notification display is the specific area (For example, the background image can be visually recognized during the big win from a specific area of the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately display the application amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player confirms the amount of gaming value that has been granted in an advantageous state, the player confirms the display of the amount to be awarded. If the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character. Specific characters can be recognized accurately. Further, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the award amount display, but is intended to congratulate the player when the amount of game value imparted in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period, and since it is displayed with large size characters in the wide first display area, the background image is made visible from the specific area of the specific characters, which is called the first display area. It is possible to show the background image even a little at a conspicuous display position.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific characters include Arabic numerals 0, 4, 6, 8, and 9 (for example, the specific characters are Arabic numerals "0", "4", " 6", "8", "9", etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately display the application amount display and notification display using Arabic numerals in relation to the background image.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means displays the notification display while displaying the display of the amount to be awarded (for example, the image display device 5 displays the obtained number It is also possible to display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH while the display 20SHK is being displayed.

According to such a configuration, even when the information display is displayed, it is possible to accurately grasp the amount of the game value given in the jackpot game state by the display of the amount of giving.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means can display the notification display in the first display area and the second display area (for example, an image The display device 5 may be capable of displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

According to such a configuration, the notification display becomes more noticeable to the player, and it is possible to suitably notify that the amount of game value awarded in an advantageous state has reached the predetermined amount.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the display means can display a specific display regarding the advantageous state in front of the background image in the second area ( For example, in the second display area 20SH52, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM on the front side of the background image during the jackpot. , the characters used for the specific display include characters of the same type as the characters used for the application amount display and the notification display, and characters different from the characters used for the application amount display and the notification display. , Any type of character includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed (for example, used for jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, right-handed display 20SHM) The characters used include the same type of characters as the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and the characters different from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. The type of character also includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed, etc.), the specific character used for the specific display is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. (For example, the specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are such that the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from a specific area, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the specific character can be accurately recognized even for the specific display.

(6) The gaming machine according to the second form of the characterizing part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, it can be controlled in a jackpot game state), and display means (For example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means is a first display area and an area around the first display area. a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51 that is the first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than ), and the display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, , the image display device 5 can display a background video during a big win corresponding to a big win gaming state in the first display region 20SH51 and the second display region 20SH52, etc.), and the background video in the second display region (For example, the image display device 5 can display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given on the front side of the given game value (for example, the image display device 5 can display the given amount on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. (e.g., the number of winning balls can be displayed), and at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, a notification that the amount of game value provided has reached a predetermined amount. As displays, there are a first notification display for notifying that the amount of given game value has reached the first predetermined amount, and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of given game value has reached the second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state in front of the background image during the jackpot in at least the first display area 20SH51. When the number of awarded balls reaches ``1000'' in the jackpot game state, the win count notice display of ``over 1000'' can be displayed as the win count notice display for notifying that the player has won the jackpot game state. When the number of awarded balls reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquired number notification display such as "over 2000"). It is updated every time it is given (for example, the display of the number of wins is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), and the notification display has a specific period after the start of display. The display is terminated when the number of acquisitions has elapsed (for example, the acquisition number notification display is terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display started), and the characters used for the notification display are the given amount The characters are larger in size than the characters used for display (for example, the characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions are larger than the characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions, etc.), and the amount display and The characters used for the notification display include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions and the number of acquisitions notification display are the lines forming the characters). (e.g., including a specific character that forms a specific area surrounded by), and the specific character used for the display of the amount to be applied is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, used for displaying the number of acquisitions The specific characters used for the notification display are such that the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area, etc.), and the specific characters used for the notification display are the lines forming the characters rather than the specific characters used for the display of the amount to be awarded. The ratio of the size of the specific region to the size of the region is small (for example, the specific character used for the display of the number of acquisitions has a larger size of the area of the line forming the character than the specific character used for the display of the number of acquisitions) , etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately display the application amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player confirms the amount of gaming value that has been granted in an advantageous state, the player confirms the display of the amount to be awarded. If the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character. Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above, the characters used for the notification display are three-dimensional characters (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display are three-dimensional characters), and the three-dimensional characters are The line area to be formed may include an area representing a character and an area representing the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the notification display.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific character used for the notification display is such that the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display). , the background video during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the notification display is not always displayed in the advantageous state like the award amount display, but is displayed when the amount of the game value imparted in the advantageous state reaches the predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the meaning of congratulating a person, is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area forming the characters is small, it is possible to reduce the risk of misidentifying the characters even if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character. can increase

(9) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific character used for the notification display is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the acquisition number notification display in Modification 1). The specific character used in the above may be such that the background image during the big hit cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI4.

According to such a configuration, the winning number notification display is not always displayed in the big win game state like the winning number display, but the number of prize balls awarded in the big win game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time in the sense of congratulating the player when the character is drawn, and is displayed in a large size character in the wide first display area 20SH51, and is a specific area relative to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Since the size ratio is small, it is possible to suppress discomfort even if the background image is not visible from the specific area of the specific character. can be prevented from being misidentified.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the display means can change the mode of the notification display to a specific mode (for example, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number The notification display 20SHKH can be stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and when the specific period has passed since the notification display mode changed to the specific mode, the notification display mode is changed. Change to a mode different from the specific mode (for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51, the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH is framed out. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the notification display is displayed.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above, the characters used for the notification display are displayed in a plurality of colors in the line regions forming the characters (for example, the modification of the characteristic portion 20SH in the second mode). 2, the line area forming the characters is displayed in three-color gradation, etc.), and the display means changes the combination of the plurality of types of colors over time. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the character modes used for the acquisition number notification display in the following manner: display mode A → display mode B → display mode C → display mode D → display mode E → display mode F → display mode G → display mode A → . The speed at which the combination of the plurality of types of colors changes differs depending on whether the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 or when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped. The speed at which the acquisition number notification display changes may be different depending on whether the player is moving (frame-in/frame-out).

According to such a configuration, since the display mode changes according to the moving speed of the notification display, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(12) The gaming machine according to the fourth form of the characterizing part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state that allows the game to progress faster than the normal state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is possible to control to a variable probability state with time saving control that can progress the game faster than the normal state, etc.), display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.). The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area surrounding the first display area and narrower than the first display area (for example, an image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means , the background image corresponding to the special state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display the background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 , the background image can be displayed during ST, etc.), and in the second display area, in front of the background image, it is possible to display the number of fluctuations display regarding the number of fluctuations in the special state (for example, an image display device 5, in the second display area 20SH52, on the front side of the background image during ST, the remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of ST number in the probability changing state can be displayed, etc.), at least in the first display area, In front of the background image, as a frequency notification display for notifying the number of times of change when the value of the display of the number of times of change reaches a predetermined value, the number of times of change is notified when the value of the display of the number of times of change reaches a first predetermined value. It is possible to display a first number of times notification display and a second number of times notification display that notifies the number of times of change when the value of the change number of times display reaches a second predetermined value (for example, the image display device 5 may display at least the first In the 1 display area 20SH51, when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times on the front side of the ST background image, a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed by the remaining number of times display 20SHST to notify the predetermined number of times. A remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH that notifies "60" when the remaining number of times displayed by the remaining number of times reaches 60, and a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH that notifies "50" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50. , etc.), and the display of the number of fluctuations is updated each time the variable display is performed (for example, the remaining number display 20SHST is updated each time the variable display is performed, etc.) , the number of times notification display ends when a specific period of time elapses after the start of display (for example, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends the display when a predetermined period of time has passed after the start of display). etc.), and the characters used for the display of the number of times are larger in size than the characters used for the display of the number of fluctuations (for example, the characters used for the display of the number of remaining times 20SHSTH are The characters used for the display of the number of times of fluctuation and the number of times notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed ( For example, the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), the specific characters used for the variation number display are from the specific area The background image is not visible (for example, the specific character used for the remaining count display 20SHST is such that the background image is not visible during ST from the specific area 20SHI6, etc.), and the specific character used for the count notification display The background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the background image during the ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI7 for the specific characters used in the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH, etc.). do.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the change count display and the count notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of fluctuations in the special state, the number of fluctuations is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area. When the background image is visible, the specific characters may look different from the original characters, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters are accurately recognized. be able to. In addition, the number notification display is not always displayed like the variable number display, but is limited to a specific period in the sense of alerting the player that the remaining number indicated by the variable number display reaches a predetermined number. Since it is displayed in a large size character in the wide first display area, by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific character, in the conspicuous display position of the first display area, It is possible to show the background image even a little.

(13) In the gaming machine of (12) above, the display means can display the characters used for the number-of-times notification display in a transmissive mode in which an image on the back side can be seen through an area of lines forming the characters. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the characters used for the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back side can be seen through the lines forming the characters. etc).

According to such a configuration, the background image can be visually recognized while the number-of-games notification display is being displayed, so that unnecessary stress can be prevented from being given to the player.

(14) In the gaming machine of (13) above, the first display area includes a variable display area in which identification information is variably displayed (for example, the first display area 20SH51 is "left", "middle", including the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.), the display means can display the number of times notification display on the front side of the identification information in the variable display area (for example, , the image display device 5 can display the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize the variable display of the identification information while displaying the number-of-games notification display, so that unnecessary stress can be prevented from being given to the player.

(15) In the gaming machine of (14) above, when the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner, the display means displays the number of times notification display in the transparent mode (for example, the image display device 5 can (When the display result of the display is derived and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is transparent.).

According to such a configuration, even if the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner while the number-of-times notification display is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (15) above, the display means is capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value that has been given (for example, the image display device 5 , can display the winning number display 20SHK related to the number of awarded balls, etc.), and display the number of times notification display (for example, image display The device 5 displays the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the application amount display from deteriorating due to the display of the number of times notification display.

(17) The gaming machine according to the first form of the characterizing part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled in a jackpot game state). etc.), display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is the first display area 20SH51 and the area around the first display area 20SH51); and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means indicates that the advantageous state is progressing in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the first background image corresponding to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. A background image can be displayed during a big hit, etc.), and a second background image corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed at least in the first display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least In the first display area 20SH51, the ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state can be displayed, etc.), when the second background image is not displayed, in the second display area, the In front of the first background image, it is possible to display a specific suggestion image that suggests the progress of the game (for example, the image display device 5 can display , on the front side of the background image during the big win, it is possible to display the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the pending game, which suggests that it will be controlled to the big win game state corresponding to the stored pending information, etc.); In the second display area, in front of the first background image, it is possible to display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value (for example, the image display device 5 can display the In the front side of the background image during the big win, it is possible to display the winning number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded balls, etc.), and when the second background image is displayed, at least in the first display area, In front of the second background image, it is possible to display a result notification display that notifies the amount of game value awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 can display the ending background image and Result display 20SHRE for notifying the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state can be displayed in front of the ending background image at least in the first display area 20SH51 when the result notification display is larger than the characters used to display the awarded amount (for example, the characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK). etc.), the characters used for the display of the amount to be given and the display of the result notification include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, 20 SHK for the number of acquisitions display and 20 SHRE for the result display The characters used include specific characters forming a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used for the display of the applied amount are selected from the specific area, the first background image and the first background image. The specific suggestive video is not visible (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, the background video during the big hit and the effect video 20SHRE of the reservation notice, etc. are not visible from the specific area), For the specific characters used for the result notification display, the second background image can be seen from the specific area (for example, for the specific characters used for the result display 20SHRE, the ending background image can be seen from the specific area 20SHI5). etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the application amount display including the specific characters in relation to the first background image and the specific suggestive image, and display the result notification including the specific characters in conjunction with the second background image. It can be conveniently displayed in relation. For example, when the player confirms the amount of gaming value that has been granted in an advantageous state, the player confirms the display of the amount to be awarded. Since it may overlap with the suggestive video, if the first background video or the specific suggestive video is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may appear to be different from the original character. By making it impossible to visually recognize the background image and the specific suggestive image during the big win from the specific area of , the specific characters can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result notification display is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area and does not overlap with the specific suggestive video, so by making the second background video visible from the specific area of the specific characters, It is possible to show the second background image even a little in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(18) In the gaming machine of (17) above, a setting means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot winning probability any one of a plurality of different setting values "1" to "6" can be set), and the display means indicates the setting value set by the setting means (for example, the image display device 5 can display the ending background video in a manner suggesting the set value), and the specific suggestion video is It is one aspect of a plurality of types of suggestive images that suggest the advantageous state, and does not suggest the set value set by the setting means (for example, the effect image 20 SHRE of the pending notice is a predictor of the reliability of the big hit. Although it is one of a plurality of types of advance notice effects, the setting suggesting effect due to the pending advance notice is not executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the setting value is suggested by the second background image, so it is significant that the second background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used for the result notification display. increases.

(19) In the gaming machine of (17) or (18) above, the display means starts displaying the second background image with a predetermined brightness (for example, the image display device 5 displays the ending background image with a predetermined brightness). at the timing of starting the display of the result notification display, the second background image is paused and displayed at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and the specific brightness is displayed. Display the result notification display with a brightness brighter than the brightness (for example, the image display device 5 temporarily suspends the ending background image with a specific brightness darker than a predetermined brightness at the timing T3 when the display of the result display 20SHRE is started. and displaying the result display 20 SHRE with brightness brighter than a specific brightness, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the visibility of the result notification display.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 19SH)
Next, a game machine related to the characteristic portion 19SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-1 to 15-6. The image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the characteristic portion 19SH displays the winning number of the number of prize balls given by the game balls entering the big winning opening in the big win game state, and the number of winning balls to be given in the big win game state. and a display of the number of expected winning balls related to the total number of prize balls. Further, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the display of the expected number of winnings invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs. Then, the image display device 5 updates the value of the expected acquisition number display when the expected acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over-winning effect before the display of the expected winning number becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 19SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Production action when a prize is won during a round game)
FIG. 15-1 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when winning occurs during a round game. FIG. 15-2 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-1(A), when it is controlled in the big win game state, the winning number display 20 SHK, and the game ball is in the big win game state in the big win game state. A win number display 20SHK1 relating to the number of prize balls awarded by entering the game and a scheduled win number display 20SHK2 relating to the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 15-1(A), the acquisition number display 20SHK is separated by a central bracket line "/", such as "135/1500", and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 with "135" in the numerator. 20SHK2 is arranged and is displayed in a fractional format, with the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 with "1500" in the denominator. 15-1(A), the winning number display 20SHK shows that 135 balls are given as the game balls enter the big winning opening in the big win game state, and are given in the big win game state. This indicates that the total number of prize balls to be played is 1500.

Also in this embodiment, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. In the second display area 20SH52, the big win display 20SHO, the decoration pattern display 20SHZ, and the round number display 20SHR are displayed. , a right-handed display 20SHM is also displayed. In addition, on the image display device 5, a background image during the big win in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed corresponding to the progress of the round game in the big win game state. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 15-2, the background image during the big win is displayed on the display layer arranged behind the display layer on which the win number display 20SHK is displayed.

When the game ball enters the big winning hole in the jackpot game state and the prize ball is provided, the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning number in the effect mode as shown in FIGS. 15-1 (B) to (F). Update the value of 20SHK.

When a game ball enters the big winning hole in the jackpot game state and a prize ball is given, the effect control CPU 120 first, as shown in FIG. In the display area near the position of the variable winning ball device 7, the display of the effect display is started. Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is arranged at the lower right position of the image display device 5 as seen from the player. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 15-1(B), an effect display 20SHEF simulating a tornado is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5 . At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 15-1(C). In the example shown in FIG. 15-1(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed above the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF that started to be displayed is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area. moving upwards in the area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 15-1(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Also at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 15-1(D). Here, as shown in FIG. 15-2, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer arranged on the front side of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible. At this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be visually recognized, but as shown in FIG. 15-2(D), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 15-1(D), the effect display 20SHEF is moved to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, so that the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is recognized. As long as it is impossible to do so, a part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be made difficult to see.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 15-1 (D) to (E) and FIGS. Thus, when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when game balls enter the big winning hole, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 15-1(D) to (E) and FIGS. 15-2(D) to (E), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" to "150".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 15-1(F). In the example shown in FIG. 15-1(F), after the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible, and it is possible to confirm that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 has been updated. can.

According to such an effect mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, so that the attention can be drawn to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, attention to the acquired number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. When it becomes , it is possible to appropriately recognize that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1, which has been focused on, has been updated.

(Example of production operation when over winning occurs)
FIG. 15-3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when over winning occurs. FIG. 15-4 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled so that the big winning hole is closed when the tenth game ball enters the big winning hole in one round game. A so-called over winning may occur in which the second game ball enters the big winning opening following the tenth game ball. When over-winning occurs, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the winning number display 20SHK in the effect mode as shown in FIG. 15-3.

When over winning occurs, the effect control CPU 120 first forms a large winning opening in the same way as when up to the tenth winning occurs, as shown in FIGS. 15-3 (A) to (B). Effect display is started in a display area close to the position of the special variable winning ball device 7. In the example shown in FIG. 15-3(B), an effect display 20SHEF simulating a tornado is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5 . At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 15-3(C). In the example shown in FIG. 15-3(C), since the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed above the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF that started to be displayed is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area. moving upwards in the area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 15-3(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Also at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Before it becomes invisible or difficult, an over-winning presentation is started for notifying that an over-winning has occurred. In the example shown in FIG. 15-3(C), the image display device 5 displays an over winning effect image in which the character CHCB appears.

Note that the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect by another effect device as an over winning effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 15-3(C), the effect control CPU 120 outputs, as an over-winning effect, an over-winning sound that is different from the normal winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the example shown in FIG. 15-3(C), the over-winning sound of "picon picon" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the attacker lamp 9c to emit light in a light emission mode different from the normal winning sound as an over winning effect.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 15-3(D). Here, as shown in FIG. 15-4, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible. At this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be visually recognized, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated as shown in FIG. 15-4(D).

In the example shown in FIG. 15-3(D), the effect display 20SHEF is moved to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, so that the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is recognized. As long as it is impossible to do so, a part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be made difficult to see.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 15-3(D) to (E) and FIGS. Thus, when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. In the examples shown in FIGS. 15-3 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 15-4 (D) to (E), the value of acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "150" to "165", and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 15-3(F). In the example shown in FIG. 15-3(F), the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible after the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, and the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 have been updated. can be confirmed.

According to such an effect mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, so that the attention can be drawn to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, attention to the acquired number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. When the display 20SHK becomes visible, it is possible to suitably recognize that the values of the obtained number display 20SHK1 and the expected number of obtained display 20SHK2, which have been focused on, have been updated.

In particular, when over winning occurs, not only the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 but also the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is updated, so that the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state is given due to the over winning. It is possible to appropriately recognize that the number of winning balls has been increased by the number of winning balls.

After ending the display of the effect display 20SHEF, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over winning effect as shown in FIG. 15-3(G). In the example shown in FIG. 15-3(G), the display of the over-win effect image displayed on the image display device 5 as the over-win effect is ended, and the background image during the big win in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed.

(Suggestion of setting by over-winning performance)
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, by using the display result determination table according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball output rate, and "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6". The higher the value, the higher the payout rate. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the degree of advantage for the player is the lowest, and the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". Benefit increases step by step. In this embodiment, set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings" and set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings."

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to change the set value, and is configured to be able to execute the above-described over winning effect as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value. For example, when the setting value is low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect image in which the character CHCB appears on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. An over-winning sound of "Picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, when the setting value is high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect image in which the character CHCC appears on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. An over-winning sound of "People!" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

It should be noted that the setting suggesting effect by the over winning effect may not definitely suggest whether the set value is low or high. For example, when the set value is set low, the over winning effect shown in FIG. 15-5(B) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate, or when the set value is set high. In addition, the over winning effect shown in FIG. 15-5(A) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate.

In addition, the over-winning effect may differ in the effect mode depending on whether the set value is "6", which is the highest advantage for the player, or when the set value is not "6". Also, the over-winning effect may be different in effect mode depending on whether the set value is an odd number or when the set value is an even number.

(If there are rounds in which the predetermined number of prizes did not win and rounds in which over prizes occurred)
FIG. 14-6 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when there are rounds in which a predetermined number of prizes have not been won and rounds in which over-winning has occurred in the characteristic portion 19SH.

As described above, the open state of the jackpot game state is continued until the timing when the predetermined period elapses or the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches the predetermined number, whichever is earlier. .

In the example shown in FIGS. 15-6 (A) to (B), in the round game of one round, although there were 9 prizes, before the number of game balls entering the big prize opening reached 10 After 29.5 seconds have passed, one round of the round game is finished, and a second round of the round game is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6(B), in response to the fact that 9 prizes were won during one round of the round game, the winning number display 20SHK of "135/1500" is displayed. ing. In this example, it is assumed that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed is 1,500.

In the round game of 2 rounds, the number of game balls entering the big winning hole reaches 10, the round game of 2 rounds is ended, and 10 prizes are won in the round game of 3 rounds. and That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls are awarded in round games of the 2nd and 3rd rounds. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 15-6(C).

Then, it is assumed that over-winning has occurred in the round game of three rounds. In this case, as shown in FIG. 15-6(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and the over winning effect is executed while the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 15-6(E), the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, but when the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see, the acquired number display 20SHK value is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-6(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", and the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, in the 4th to 10th rounds of the round game, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches 10 and the round game of each round is ended. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 15-6(G).

Then, when all 10 rounds of the round game are completed, an ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. is notified.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed was 1500, but over winning occurred in 3 rounds of round games. The value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is "1515". However, since there were only 9 wins in one round of the round game, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is not "1515" but "1500".

According to this embodiment, when there are rounds in which the predetermined number of prizes were not won and rounds in which over-winnings occurred, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 becomes a value smaller than the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2. , and the final winning number display 20SHK, it is easy to understand that there were rounds in which the predetermined number of prizes were not won, and there were rounds in which over winnings occurred.

FIG. 14-7 is a diagram showing another example of the performance operation when there are rounds in which the predetermined number of prizes have not been won and rounds in which over-winning has occurred in the characteristic portion 19SH.

In the example shown in FIGS. 15-7 (A) to (B), in the round game of one round, although there were 9 winnings, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have passed, one round of the round game is finished, and a second round of the round game is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-7(B), in response to the fact that 9 prizes were won during one round of the round game, the winning number display 20SHK of "135/1500" is displayed. ing. In this example, it is assumed that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed is 1,500.

In the round game of 2 rounds, the number of game balls entering the big winning hole reaches 10, the round game of 2 rounds is ended, and 10 prizes are won in the round game of 3 rounds. and That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls are awarded in round games of the 2nd and 3rd rounds. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 15-7(C).

Then, it is assumed that over-winning has occurred in the round game of three rounds. In that case, as shown in FIG. 15-7(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and the over winning effect is executed while the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 15-7(E), the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, but when the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see, the acquired number display 20SHK1 value is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-7(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", but the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is not updated and remains "1500".

Then, in the 4th to 10th rounds of the round game, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches 10 and the round game of each round is ended. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 15-7(G).

Then, when all 10 rounds of the round game are completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. is notified.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of the round game are executed is 1500, but over winning occurs in the 3 rounds of the round game. However, the value of the final expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 remains "1500". However, since there were only 9 wins in one round of the round game, the value of the final winning number display 20SHK1 is "1500".

According to such an embodiment, when there are rounds in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and rounds in which over-winnings occurred, the values of the winning number display 20SHK1 and the expected winning number display 20SHK2 do not cause discomfort. be able to.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 19SH can be controlled to the jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special variable winning ball device 7 which can be changed between an open state in which game balls can easily win and a closed state in which game balls cannot or cannot win a prize. In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state when being controlled to the jackpot game state. . In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 capable of executing an over-win effect when an over-win occurs in one round game. The image display device 5 displays the winning number display 20SHK1 related to the number of winning balls given by the game balls entering the special variable winning ball device 7, and the winning number display 20SHK1 relating to the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state. A planned number display 20SHK2 can be displayed. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected winning number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs. Further, the image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the expected winning number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, a sense of incongruity is caused more than when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated while the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is visible. can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes speakers 8L and 8R. The effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect by the image display device 5 and the effect by the speakers 8L and 8R as the over winning effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the over-winning effect.

Further, as described above, when the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and displays the effect display. 20SHEF is moved to make the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the entry of the game ball into the special variable prize winning device 7 can be represented by the display effect on the image display device 5, and the amusement can be improved. In addition, the effect display 20SHEF makes not only the expected number of acquisition display 20SHK2 but also the number of acquisition display 20SHK1 invisible or difficult to see.

Further, as described above, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect indicator 20SHEF is moving, and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed. When the effect display 20SHEF reaches the area, it becomes invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, when the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 automatically come into view. Therefore, attention can be drawn to the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 before the value is updated due to the attention on the effect display 20SHEF.

Also, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of wins display 20SHK1 and the number of expected wins display 20SHK2 are displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that an over-winning has occurred by executing the over-winning effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is updated. It can be suppressed more effectively.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities. Then, the image display device 5 can execute the over-winning effect in a manner suggesting the set value.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the over winning effect.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over-winning effect after the effect display 20SHEF ends.

According to such a configuration, since the updated value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 can be visually recognized while the over-winning effect continues, a sense of discomfort caused by the updating of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is made visible. can be suppressed more effectively.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 19SH)
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 19SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of an error detection code and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game, but also the state of the backup flag and error detection code. Even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, by executing such power supply stop processing, the CPU 103 can resume the game before the power failure after the power failure is restored. can continue.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 does not back up various data for proceeding with the effect. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 cannot continue the effect based on the game information before the power failure after the power failure is restored.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure during the round game, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the effect corresponding to the round game after the power is restored. In that case, the effect control CPU 120, in the round game after power failure restoration, does not perform the display of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2, or a specific display such as "????/????" The acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed without displaying the values. In addition, even if a prize is won in the round game after power failure is restored, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the effect display 20SHEF because the image display device 5 does not execute the effect corresponding to the round game. . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the over winning effect by the image display device 5 if it can be specified that an over winning effect has occurred in one round of the round game after the restoration of power supply, and the speakers 8L, 8R. It is possible to execute an over winning effect by the attack lamp 9c. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 can specify that over winning has occurred, for example, by means of a effect control command for notifying that over winning has occurred.

According to such a configuration, in a situation in which the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 cannot be confirmed after the power is restored, the effect display 20SHEF is not displayed so as not to cause discomfort. On the other hand, if over-winning occurs, it is possible to notify that effect.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 19SH)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and the display Means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 has an image display device 5, etc.), a variable that can be changed between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium cannot or is difficult to win Winning means (for example, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can change between an open state in which game balls can easily win and a closed state in which game balls cannot or are difficult to win), Control means (for example, pachinko) capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when being controlled to the advantageous state; The game machine 1 is equipped with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state when being controlled to the jackpot game state.) a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when more than a predetermined number of game media wins the variable prize winning means in one of the round games (for example, the pachinko machine 1 can , including a production control CPU 120 capable of executing an over-winning effect when an over-winning occurs, etc.), and the display means is provided when the game medium wins the variable winning means It is possible to display (for example, the image display device 5 is , an acquisition number display 20SHK1 related to the number of prize balls given by the game balls entering the special variable winning ball device 7, and a scheduled acquisition number display 20SHK2 related to the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state. displayable, etc.), and when game media greater than the predetermined number win the variable winning means, it is possible to display a specific display that makes the second award amount display invisible or difficult (for example, The image display device 5 is capable of displaying an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected winning number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs, etc.), and the second awarded amount display is visible by the specific display. When it is impossible or difficult, the value of the second grant amount display is updated (for example, the image display device 5 updates the value of the display of the expected acquisition amount 20SHK2 by the effect display 20SHEF. , updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF, etc.), the specific effect execution means starts the specific effect (for effect control The CPU 120 is characterized by starting an over-winning effect before the expected winning number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, when the value of the display of the second application amount is updated, a sense of discomfort is caused more than when the value of the display of the second application amount is updated while the display of the second application amount is visible. can be suppressed.

(2) The game machine of (1) above includes audio output means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with speakers 8L and 8R), and the specific effect execution means uses the specific effect as the specific effect. An effect by the display means and an effect by the audio output means can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect by the image display device 5 and an effect by the speakers 8L and 8R as the over-winning effect. executable, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the specific performance.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, when the game medium wins the variable winning means, the display means starts displaying the specific display in a display area close to the variable winning means. Then, the specific display is moved to make the first award amount display and the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see (for example, the image display device 5 is configured so that the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7). Then, the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started in a display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and the effect display 20SHEF is moved to make the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see. etc.).

According to such a configuration, the entry of the game ball into the variable winning means can be represented by the display effect on the display means, and the amusement can be improved. In addition, the specific display makes not only the display of the second application amount but also the display of the first application amount invisible or difficult to see, so that it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of discomfort.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, the first given amount display and the second given amount display are visible when the specific display is moving, and the first given amount display and the second given amount display are visible when the specific display is moving. When the specific display reaches the display area where the second grant amount display is displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see (for example, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 have the effect display 20SHEF moved. is visible at times, and becomes invisible or difficult to see when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the specific display approaches the display area where the first application amount display and the second application amount display are displayed, the first application amount display and the second application amount display are naturally visible. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the first application amount display and the second application amount display in the state before the value is updated due to attention to the specific display.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above, the specific effect executing means may perform the above-described Start a specific effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 starts an over winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed) .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that the game media greater than the predetermined number have won the variable winning means by executing the specific effect, so that the display of the second award amount is updated. It is possible to more effectively suppress the feeling of discomfort that occurs when the device is used.

(6) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, setting means (for example, pachinko game The machine 1 is capable of setting one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities, etc.), and the specific effect execution means is configured to perform the setting The specific effect can be executed in a manner suggesting the set value set by the means (for example, the image display device 5 can execute an over winning effect in a manner suggesting the set value). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the specific effect.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) above, the specific effect executing means ends the specific effect after the display of the specific display ends (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the display of the effect display 20SHEF is (e.g., ending the over-winning effect after finishing).

According to such a configuration, since the updated value of the display of the second applied amount can be visually recognized while the specific effect is continuing, the sense of incongruity caused by the update of the display of the second applied amount can be eliminated. , can be suppressed more effectively.

(Another example of transition to a time-saving state)
In addition, in each characteristic part and each modification described above, regarding the transition to the time saving state, the form of transitioning via the big hit state and the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is always operated is exemplified. , the invention is not limited thereto. For example, when a time-saving design is derived and displayed as a special design, the state may be shifted to a time-saving state without operating the special variable winning ball device 7 .

In addition, as the above-described time-saving patterns, these time-saving patterns may be used as part of the winning design or may be used as part of the small winning design.

In addition, when performing the lottery processing related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a special random number for the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processing, or the lottery random number of the lost pattern and the big hit pattern The lottery may be performed using random numbers for other lotteries such as lottery random numbers for small winning symbols, random numbers for judging big win lottery, and lottery random numbers for falling lottery.

In addition, these time-saving patterns may be a plurality of types of patterns, and may be used in combination with other patterns such as a small winning pattern or a winning pattern. In addition, in this case, the presence or absence of transition to the time saving state may be determined according to the small winning pattern to be used together. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

In addition, in the case of performing the lottery of the time-saving design, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving design does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving design in all the setting values are the same. However, the lottery probability of these time-saving symbols may be a different probability between the first special figure and the second special figure.

In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for the time saving pattern, even when using a dedicated random number or using another random number, the timing at the time of winning the starting port good.

In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, if a dedicated random number is used, the lottery result of the dedicated random number will be the winning value, and if a small-hit design random number is used for the time-saving design lottery, a specific small-hit design The random number is used as the winning value, and when the random number for the falling lottery determination value is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, the random number for the falling lottery determination value can be used as the winning value, and the lottery using the structure, for example, the special variable winning ball A time-saving area may be provided inside the device 7, and the fact that the game ball passes through the time-saving area may be regarded as winning of the time-saving design.

When the lottery for the time saving pattern is performed using a structure and the small winning pattern is used together with the time saving pattern, the number of times of variable display of the time saving state is not changed depending on whether or not the time saving area is passed.

In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, if random numbers are used for the lottery of time-saving patterns, a specific random number will be used as the winning value, and if random numbers are used for the lottery of time-saving patterns, it will be specified. A jackpot pattern random number value can be used as a winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time saving pattern may be the timing after the big hit determination. Incidentally, the lottery for the time-saving symbol is not executed in the time-saving state or the high-probability state, but is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, regardless of which random number value is used for the lottery. However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, whether the number of times of time-saving is reset or whether the lottery is not performed may be determined for each game machine.

In addition, as for the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value and each game state. Moreover, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

Further, when the number of times of time saving is different according to the time saving pattern, it is possible to change the sorting lottery of the time saving pattern between the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

Further, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result of "zero number of times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

Also, the derivation lottery of the time saving end pattern may be executed, and the number of times of time saving may be the number of times until the time saving end pattern is derived and displayed after the start of time saving or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the time when the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small winning pattern random number is used for the lottery for the time saving pattern, and when the small winning is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small winning operation.

In addition, in the case of lottery using a structure, the timing to be controlled to the time-saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the game state in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to the high-probability low-base state over a predetermined number of variable display times after a big hit, the high-probability low-base state is in the high-probability low-base state when the amusement center opens, and the high-probability low base state is maintained a specified number of times. After the variable display is executed and finished, control may be performed to the time saving state.

In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed when the time saving limiter function is installed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Also, the design fixing time of the time saving pattern may be different from the design fixing time of the other patterns.

1 Pachinko machine 5 Image display device 9 Game effect lamp 9B1 Lever lamp 9B2 Button lamp 9C Upper frame lamp 9M Left frame lamp 9N Right frame lamp 11 Main board 12 Effect control board 31A Stick Controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 100... Game control microcomputer 120... Production control CPU
131 Vibration motor

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
Vibration effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect as vibration effects in which the operation means vibrates;
a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect of causing the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect;
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect in accordance with the progress of the game;
a display means;
The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed,
Depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different,
The vibration effect executing means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in conjunction with execution of the specific effect, and capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect at a timing when variable display is started,
the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area surrounding the first display area and narrower than the first display area;
The display means is
a background display corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area;
In the second display area, in front of the background display, it is possible to display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value,
In at least the first display area, on the front side of the background display, there are a first notification display displayed when the amount of awarded game value reaches a first predetermined amount; A second notification display that is displayed when the predetermined amount is reached, and any one of the notification display can be displayed,
The awarded amount display is updated each time a game value is awarded in the advantageous state,
The notification display is a display that ends after a specific period of time has passed since the display started,
The character display included in the notification display has a larger display size than the character display included in the application amount display,
The character display included in the application amount display and the notification display includes a specific character display in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character display is formed,
The specific character display included in the application amount display is such that the background display is invisible from the specific area,
In the specific character display included in the notification display, the background display is visible from the specific area,
The specific character display included in the grant amount display does not change the display position during display,
The display position of the specific character display included in the notification display is changed during display,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images